Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260513 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for mediumvoltage electrical distribution systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of cable indicated. Include splices and terminations for cables and
cable accessories.
B.
Samples: 16-inch lengths of each type of cable indicated.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
B.
Material Certificates: For each cable and accessory type, signed by manufacturers.
C.
Source quality-control test reports.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to install,
splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
Obtain cables and accessories through one source from a single
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E.
Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Cables:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
Okonite Company (The).
Pirelli Cables & Systems NA.
Rome Cable Corporation.
Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Raychem Corp.; Telephone Energy and Industrial Division; Tyco International Ltd.
Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold.
3M; Electrical Products Division.
CABLES
A.
Cable Type: MV105.
B.
Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS 8, ICEA S-93-639, and ICEA S-97-682.
C.
Conductor: Copper.
D.
Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B).
E.
Strand Filling: Conductor interstices are filled with impermeable compound.
F.
Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber.
1.
2.
G.
Voltage Rating: 35 kV.
Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level.
Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
H.
Shielding and Jacket:
polyethylene jacket.
I.
Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC.
2.3
Corrugated copper drain wires embedded in extruded, chlorinated,
SPLICE KITS
A.
Connectors and Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or splicing
kit manufacturer for the application.
B.
Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes,
ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for complete
splice, with detailed instructions.
1.
2.4
Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with outer heatshrink jacket.
SOLID TERMINATIONS
A.
Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class is
equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations.
1.
2.5
Class 1 Terminations: Heat-shrink type with heat-shrink inner stress control and outer
nontracking tubes; multiple, molded, nontracking skirt modules; and compression-type
connector.
ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS
A.
2.6
Arc-Proofing Tape: Fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3 inch thick,
compatible with cable jacket.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-97-682 before shipping.
B.
Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance according to ICEA T-31-610, using a
test pressure of 5 psig.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cables according to IEEE 576.
B.
Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and
sidewall pressure values.
1.
Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that will not
deteriorate conductor or insulation.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips that
will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to
cable.
C.
Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
D.
Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped bed of 3-inch- thick, clean sand. Separate
cables crossing other cables or piping by a minimum of 4 inches of tamped earth. Install
permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in direction, and buried splices.
E.
Install "buried-cable" warning tape 12 inches above cables.
F.
In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls
by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag.
G.
Install cable splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated; use standard kits.
H.
Install terminations at ends of conductors and seal multiconductor cable ends with standard kits.
I.
Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable at locations not
protected by conduit, cable tray, direct burial, or termination materials. In addition to arcproofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean cable sheath.
Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil pipe-wrapping tape.
Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty.
Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable.
Band arc-proofing tape with 1-inch- wide bands of half-lapped, adhesive, glass-cloth tape
2 inches o.c.
J.
Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements according to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
K.
Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors.
Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings,
and hardware.
L.
Identify cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests
and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
B.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260513
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor
cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to
35,000 V.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
General Cable Corporation.
Senator Wire & Cable Company.
Southwire Company.
B.
Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C.
Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and XHHW.
D.
Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground
wire.
2.2
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
3M; Electrical Products Division.
Tyco Electronics Corp.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
A.
Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
B.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
C.
Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
D.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions:
conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
E.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete,
Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
F.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
G.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
H.
Fire Pump Feeders: Metal Sheathed Mineral Insulated Cables.
3.3
below
Type THHN-THWN, single
Slabs-on-Grade,
and
Underground:
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.
E.
Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
F.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1.
C.
Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.6
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways
and Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.7
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors
No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to
portable scanner.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features
specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Test wells.
Ground rods.
Ground rings.
Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells ground
rings grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NFPA 70B.
a.
b.
Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within
specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values
do not.
Include recommended testing intervals.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor:
testing.
Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:
1.
2.
No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding; if wood, use pressure-treated fir,
cypress, or cedar.
D.
Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross
section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall
comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
E.
Telecommunications Grounding Bus: BICI compliant, predrilled rectangular bars of annealed
copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart.
Harger Catalog No. GBI14216TGB, or approved equal
2.2
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at
least two bolts.
1.
Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
D.
Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
2.3
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
1.
2.
Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as
part of duct-bank installation.
C.
Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
D.
Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
2.
E.
Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished
floor unless otherwise indicated.
Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top
of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B.
Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole
floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary,
install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper
conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect
ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive
insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below
concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
C.
Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts,
cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to
ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded,
hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and
fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written
instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.
D.
Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the
pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinnedcopper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding
terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation.
3.3
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Feeders and branch circuits.
Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
Metal-clad cable runs.
Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding
bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar
terminal on busway.
Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment
grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and
power-distribution units.
C.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct
and connected metallic piping.
D.
Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
E.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway
fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by
NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS JSTD-607-A.
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.4
For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide
No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode
system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment
location.
Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus.
Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch-circuit conductors.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96
when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground
directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service
grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
C.
Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
D.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if
any.
For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,
and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are
specified in Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and
shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
E.
Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated.
Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush
with finished grade or floor.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1.
2.
3.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one
of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
G.
Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
H.
Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
I.
Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure
ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building.
1.
2.
3.5
Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to
building steel.
Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building's foundation.
LABELING
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for
instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.
B.
Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the
grounding electrode conductor where exposed.
1.
Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason,
notify the facility manager."
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells
, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are
connected.
a.
b.
4.
Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,
and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and
their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena
that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
E.
Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
G.
Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).
Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
C.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
B.
Steel slotted support systems.
Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1.
2.
Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
1.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Equipment supports.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO International Corporation.
GS Metals Corp.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as
required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints:
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors:
Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
3.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less
than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1.
D.
3.2
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
edge of the base.
B.
Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C.
Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous
metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for
exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
Division 27 Section "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways,
surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and
handholes serving communications systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
C.
Samples: For wireways and for each color and texture specified, long.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D.
IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
E.
PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
1.
2.
Comply with NEMA RN 1.
Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
F.
EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
G.
FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
H.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
I.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1.
2.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations:
NFPA 70.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
b.
3.
4.
J.
Comply with UL 886 and
Material: Steel.
Type: compression.
Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and
protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
CertainTeed Corp.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
RACO; a Hubbell company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C.
RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 4 , or Type 12
unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as
required for complete system.
D.
Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
RACO; a Hubbell Company.
Robroy Industries.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold / Legrand.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and
cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
C.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
D.
Metal Floor Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material: Cast metal.
Type: Fully adjustable.
Shape: Rectangular.
Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
E.
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.
F.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
H.
Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
I.
Gangable boxes are allowed.
2.5
HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A.
General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:
1.
2.
B.
Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as
defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a
combination of the two.
1.
Manufacturers:
following:
a.
b.
c.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
Armorcast Products Company.
Carson Industries LLC.
CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
NewBasis.
Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products.
Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.
Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural
load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.".
Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts
for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks
and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A.
Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance
with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1.
2.
Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing
agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests
by manufacturer.
Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying
with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Exposed Conduit: GRC.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC or IMC.
Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC,.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4.
Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT or RNC.
Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Loading dock.
Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
Mechanical rooms.
Gymnasiums.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
5.
6.
7.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
Boxes and Enclosures:
NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 in
institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C.
Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this
type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and
apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
E.
Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F.
Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
G.
Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
E.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes
in direction.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H.
A. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
I.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum10-foot intervals.
Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.
Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
Change from RNC to GRC or IMC before rising above floor.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
2.
Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
K.
Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
L.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
M.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
N.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings
in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
O.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
P.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
Q.
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1.
2.
3.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
R.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
S.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.
Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run
length that exceeds 100 feet.
Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
T.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature
change.
Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install
fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of
flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1.
2.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
U.
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top of box
unless otherwise indicated.
V.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
W.
Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
X.
Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
Y.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
Z.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
AA.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A.
Direct-Buried Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in
nominal diameter.
Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches
of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling
with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through floor.
a.
b.
5.
3.4
Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and
encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each
side of the coupling.
For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where
conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a
minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install
insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
Underground Warning Tape:
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A.
Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C.
Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of
other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.
D.
Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and
insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.
Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough
to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.
E.
Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut
wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to
be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.6
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways
and Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.7
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
Comply with
PROTECTION
A.
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes steel cable trays and accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.
1.
C.
1.4
Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray, including plans, elevations, and
sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate
components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate
connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled cable tray
layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and
mechanical elements. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray
Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel cable tray, hot dip galvanized after fabrication, will be stored indoors to prevent water or
other foreign materials from staining or adhering to cable tray. Unpack and dry wet materials
before storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Chalfant Manufacturing Company.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Cope, T. J., Inc.; a subsidiary of Allied Tube & Conduit.
GS Metals Corp.; GLOBETRAY Products.
MONO-SYSTEMS, Inc.
MPHusky.
PW Industries.
MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A.
Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, complying with NEMA VE 1.
B.
Sizes and Configurations:
configurations.
1.
2.3
Refer to the Drawings for specific requirements for sizes and
Provide center hung wire basket tray.
CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES
A.
Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and
finishes as cable tray.
B.
Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
2.4
WARNING SIGNS
A.
Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- high, black letters on yellow background with legend "WARNING! NOT
TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR PERSONNEL."
B.
Materials and fastening are specified in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform design and production tests according to NEMA FG 1 or NEMA VE 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with recommendations in NEMA VE 2. Install as a complete system, including all
necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged
horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.
B.
Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
C.
Fasten cable tray supports to building structure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements.
Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules.
Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances
furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form
as required by application.
Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric
loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.
Locate and install supports according to NEMA FG 1 or NEMA VE 1.
D.
Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray and to equipment.
Support cable tray independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable tray on equipment
enclosure.
E.
Install expansion connectors where cable tray crosses building expansion joint and in cable tray
runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA FG 1 or NEMA VE 1. Space connectors
and set gaps according to applicable standard.
F.
Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.
G.
Make cable tray connections using standard fittings.
H.
Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
I.
Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed
cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
J.
Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.
K.
After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or near
cable trays.
3.2
CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Install cables only when cable tray installation has been completed and inspected.
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
B.
Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties as recommended by
NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable
jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.
C.
On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 18 inches. Install intermediate supports when cable
weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.
D.
Install covers after installation of cable is completed.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable tray, in addition to those required
by NFPA 70.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for
compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.5
Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in
cable tray, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause
or have caused damage.
Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable tray do not exceed that
permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communication or data-processing circuits are
separated from power circuits by barriers.
Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that
could damage cables.
Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and
retorque in suspect areas.
Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with
specified hardware.
Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that
all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray.
Report results in writing.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed cable trays.
1.
2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
cable tray manufacturer.
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to protect exposed cables from falling
objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can
be constructed of wood or metal materials until the risk of damage is over.
END OF SECTION 260536
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
Silicone sealants.
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fireresistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without
penetrating items.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement
of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that
products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department
of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Wall Sleeves:
1.
2.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,
plain ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
260544 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
B.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel
sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with
tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E.
Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
2.2
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side
larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more
sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1.
Manufacturers:
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
CALPICO, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
< Retain first option in "Sealing Elements" Subparagraph below unless Nitrile
(Buna N) rubber gasket material is required because hydrocarbons are present in
the soil.
Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A.
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in
concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
1.
Manufacturers:
following:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
260544 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
a.
2.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Presealed Systems.
GROUT
A.
Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated walls or floors.
B.
Standard:
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5
SILICONE SEALANTS
A.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below.
1.
2.
B.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces that are not fire rated.
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit
Floors and Walls:
1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly
between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;
protect material while curing.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway
or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
260544 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
4.
5.
D.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are
used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush
with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above
finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1.
2.
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
E.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G.
Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves
to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing
sleeve-seal system.
3.2
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway
entries into building.
B.
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or
cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical
sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
260544 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Identification for raceways.
Identification of power and control cables.
Identification for conductors.
Underground-line warning tape.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting
provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by
codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1.
2.
C.
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1.
2.
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high letters on
20-inch centers.
D.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted,
flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching
wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
E.
Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- wide black stripes
on 10-inch centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or
duct and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.
2.2
METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1.
2.
C.
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
D.
2.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high letters on
20-inch centers.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use
with self-locking cable tie fastener.
2.4
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide.
B.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C.
Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.5
UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A.
Tape:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
Color and Printing:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,.
Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes:
TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE,.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.7
Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq.
inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1.
2.
3.
2.8
Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
B.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
2.9
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location
(exterior or interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
D.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
E.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested
areas.
F.
Underground-Line Warning Tape:
During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
G.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface
preparation and paint application.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of
raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH
VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends.
Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that
is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in
the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B.
Accessible Raceways, Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install
labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.
C.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the
phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed
below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a.
b.
Color shall be factory applied.
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
c.
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
Phase A: Brown.
Phase B: Orange.
Phase C: Yellow.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
d.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags.
E.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
F.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
G.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1.
2.
Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
I.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
J.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Bakedenamel warning signs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Power transfer switches.
Controls with external control power connections.
K.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with
approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
L.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used
for power transfer.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
M.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a
single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two
lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
Equipment to Be Labeled:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated
acrylic or melamine label.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Switchgear.
Switchboards.
Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
Substations.
Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
Motor-control centers.
Enclosed switches.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Enclosed controllers.
Variable-speed controllers.
Push-button stations.
Power transfer equipment.
Contactors.
Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
Battery-inverter units.
Battery racks.
Power-generating units.
Monitoring and control equipment.
UPS equipment.
END OF SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device
coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device
coordination study.
1.
1.3
Coordination of series-rated devices is not permitted.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B.
Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for
system protective devices has been completed. Submittals shall be in digital form.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.
Coordination-Study Report.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
B.
Product Certificates:
For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software
programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
B.
Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude
on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1.
Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible
for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision
and control of engineer.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
C.
Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.
D.
Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A.
Available Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, companies
offering computer software programs that may be used in the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1.
2.2
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with IEEE 399.
B.
Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory,"
"very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
C.
Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-currentcharacteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device
settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective
coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.
1.
Optional Features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Arcing faults.
Simultaneous faults.
Explicit negative sequence.
Mutual coupling in zero sequence.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
1.
Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved
prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
POWER SYSTEM DATA
A.
Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
1.
2.
3.
Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections
and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment
designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams,
overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended
device settings.
Impedance of utility service entrance.
Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,
showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with
tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.3
Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, and X/R ratios.
Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,
insulation, and length.
Busway ampacity and impedance.
Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush
current, and overload capability.
Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal-damage curve.
Generator thermal-damage curve.
Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere
or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range,
and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment
range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio
for overcurrent relays.
Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating
in amperes rms symmetrical.
FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
A.
Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuitbreaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a
current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the
following:
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Switchgear and switchboard bus.
Medium-voltage controller.
Motor-control center.
Distribution panelboard.
Branch circuit panelboard.
B.
Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
C.
Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.
D.
Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with
IEEE 141 and IEEE 242.
1.
Transformers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
E.
2.
Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on
electrical distribution system diagram.
Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on mediumvoltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of overcurrent relays.
Equipment Evaluation Report:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010.
Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.
Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
Study Report:
1.
F.
ANSI C57.12.10.
ANSI C57.12.22.
ANSI C57.12.40.
IEEE C57.12.00.
IEEE C57.96.
For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or
higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication
factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;
verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors
at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal
to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
COORDINATION STUDY
A.
Perform coordination study using approved computer software program.
report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.
1.
2.
3.
Prepare a written
Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.
Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) shortcircuit currents.
Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
B.
Comply with IEEE 141 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.
C.
Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1.
Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Inrush current when first energized.
Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.
D.
Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.
E.
Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that
equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping
time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.
F.
Coordination-Study Report:
coordination study:
1.
Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Device tag.
Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup
values.
Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous
settings.
Fuse-current rating and type.
Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.
Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to
achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists
between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.
Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods
where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
G.
Prepare a written report indicating the following results of
Device tag.
Voltage and current ratio for curves.
Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
Cable damage curves.
Transformer inrush points.
Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
END OF SECTION 260573
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 260943 - DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Digital-Network Lighting Control System.
Section 260923 – Lighting Control Devices: Occupancy sensors.
Section 260926 – Lighting Control PanelBoards: Lighting panels (switching) controlled by
Digital Network Lighting Control System.
Section 260936 – Modular Dimming Controls: GRAFIK Eye QS
Section 265113 – Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts: Fluorescent electronic
dimming ballasts.
REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(ANSI/IEEE) ( and )
1.
B.
ASTM International (ASTM) ()
1.
C.
9001:2000 – Quality Management Systems.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
1.
2.
E.
D4674 -02a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics
Exposed to Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window-Filtered Daylight.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
1.
D.
C62.41-1991 – Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.
WD6 – Dimensional Specifications.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) ():
1.
94 – Flammability Rating
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
489 (2002) - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker
Enclosures.
508 (1999) - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
UL514C – Standard for Non-metallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes, and Covers.
916 – Energy Management Equipment.
924 (2003) - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
935 (2005) - Fluorescent Ballasts
1472 (1996) - Solid-State Dimming Controls.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Quantum includes computer-based software that provides control, configuration, monitoring,
alerting and reports. System includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Lighting Management Panel
Quantum Manager - light management computer
Q-Admin - light management computer software.
Factory assembled dimming and switching panels and power interfaces and power
modules.
Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces and sensors.
Solid-state high frequency fluorescent dimming ballasts.
Permanently installed occupancy sensors and power packs.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
B.
Specification Conformance Document: Indicate whether the submitted equipment:
C.
Meets specification exactly as stated.
D.
Meets specification via an alternate means and indicate the specific methodology used.
E.
Shop Drawings; include:
F.
Schematic (one-line diagram) of system.
G.
Product Data: Catalog cut sheets with performance specifications demonstrating compliance
with specified requirements.
H.
Sequence of Operation to describe how each area operates and how any building wide
functionality is described.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Sustainable Design Closeout Documentation (LSC-LEED-DOC)
1.
Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide Enhanced Start-up documentation that
details the start-up procedure being performed including a process to follow, details on
tests performed and an area that documents any test results.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of lighting management systems.
B.
Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standard, including inhouse engineering for product design activities.
C.
Lighting control system components:
1.
1.8
Listed by UL specifically for the required loads. Provide evidence of compliance upon
request.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive
equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.9
Ambient temperature: 0 degrees to 40 degrees C (32 degrees to 104 degrees F).
Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
Lighting control system must be protected from dust during installation.
Ambient temperature for Q-Manager, system computer: 10 degrees C to 35 degrees C
(50 degrees F – 90 degrees F)
WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer’s Enhanced 8 Year Limited Warranty:
1.
2.
1.10
8-year limited parts warranty for the replacement of defective Quantum Digital-Network
Lighting Components from the date of system startup completion.
2-year Silver Level Support and Maintenance Plan that covers 100 percent parts and
labor from the date of the system startup completion.
Maintenance MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to
end-user.
B.
Make new replacement parts available for minimum of 10 years from date of manufacture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of design product: Lutron Quantum or subject to compliance and prior approval with
specified requirements of this section, one of the following:
1.
Lutron Quantum
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
1.
2.
2.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for
approval by the design professional a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date
and must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied
by a review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis.
By using pre-approved substitutions, the contractor accepts responsibility and associated
costs for all required modifications to circuitry, devices, and wiring. The contractor shall
provide complete engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations for
the original design highlighted in an alternate color to the engineer for review and
approval prior to rough-in.
GENERAL
A.
Lighting Controls: Ten-year operational life while operating continually at any temperature in an
ambient temperature range of 0 degrees C (32 degrees F) to 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) and
90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
B.
Designed and tested to withstand discharges without impairment of performance when
subjected to discharges of 15,000 volts per IEC 801-2.
2.3
DIMMING / RELAY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20 degrees C below the component manufacturer's
maximum temperature rating when device is under fully-loaded conditions in 40 degrees C (104
degrees F) ambient temperature.
B.
Load Handling Thyristors (SCRs and triacs), Field Effect Transistors (FETs), and Isolated Gate
Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs): The component’s maximum current rating to be at least two times
the dimmer’s/relay’s rated operating current.
C.
Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times operating current without impacting
lifetime of dimmer/relay.
D.
Design and test dimmers/relays to withstand line-side surges without impairment to
performance.
1.
2.
Panels: Withstand surges without impairment of performance when subjected to surges
of 6,000 volts, 3,000 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and per IEC 61000-4-5 surge
requirements.
Other power handling devices: Withstand surges without impairment of performance
when subjected to surges of 6,000 volts, 200 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41.
E.
Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
F.
Power failure memory and dimmer/relay recovery:
1.
When power is interrupted and subsequently returned, within 3 seconds lights will
automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or off) prior to power
interruption.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
G.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Dimmers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for incoming line voltage variations
including changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus 2 percent change in RMS
voltage/cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz change in frequency/second),
dynamic harmonics, and line noise.
Systems not providing cycle-by-cycle compensation to include external power
conditioning equipment as part of dimming system.
Each dimmer to incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly
ramps lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.
Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manor. Dimmers with visible steps are
not acceptable.
Each dimmer to be assigned a load type that will provide a proper dimming curve for the
specific light source.
Possess ability to have load types assigned per circuit, configured in field.
Minimum and maximum light levels user adjustable on circuit-by-circuit basis.
Line Voltage Dimmers; Meet following load-specific requirements:
a.
Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) transformer:
1)
b.
Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) transformer:
1)
c.
Dimmer to operate electronic low voltage transformers via reverse phase
control. Alternately, forward phase control dimming may be used if dimming
equipment manufacturer has recommended specific ELV transformers being
provided.
Neon and cold cathode transformers:
1)
9.
Contain circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC
waveform to input of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472,
Section 5.11.
Magnetic transformers: UL listed for use with normal (low) power factor
magnetic transformers.Electronic transformers: Must be supported by the
ballast equipment manufacturer for control of specific ballasts being
provided.
Low Voltage Dimming Modules; Meet following requirements:
a.
b.
Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay: Capable
of being electronically linked to single zone.
Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:
1)
0-10V analog voltage signal.
a)
b)
c)
2)
3)
4)
Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC
60929.
Sink current via IEC 60929.
Source current.
10-0V reverse analog voltage signal.
DSI digital communication.
DALI broadcast communication IEC 60929:
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
a)
b)
5)
H.
PWM IEC 60929.
Non-dim circuits to meet the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Logarithmic intensity values in compliance with IEC 60929.
Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.
Rated life of relay at full load: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is
applied to and removed from load circuits.
Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
POWER PANELS
A.
Product: Lutron GP Series.
B.
Mechanical:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Listed to UL 508as industrial control equipment.
To acquire UL listing on field assembled panels, a UL inspector must test the installed
equipment on site. This will add costs to the project and could result in delays. Factory
assembled panels are fully tested and UL/CSA listed when delivered to the site. These
pre-assembled panels can be quickly installed and eliminate potential assembly errors in
the field, saving installation costs.
Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel.
Field wiring accessible from front of panel without need to remove dimmer assemblies or
other components.
Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
Ship panels with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper bar
inserted between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load current and be
reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of
connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.
Electrical:
1.
2.
Panels contain branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a
dedicated feed-through type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Branch circuit breakers; meet following performance requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits.
Contain visual trip indicator; rated at 10,000 AIC, 120 V Dimming, 14,000 AIC, 277
V Dimming, 18,000 AIC.
Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature
protection. Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to
have integral thermal protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient
temperature is above rating of panel.
Accept tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in off position when
servicing loads.
Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other
components in panel.UL listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be switched
on and off by breakers.
Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 25,000A.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
D.
Lutron GP Series Grafik Panel Architectural Lighting Control Panel:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Dimmers designed and tested to specifically control incandescent/tungsten, magnetic low
voltage, electronic low voltage, neon/cold cathode, fluorescent dimming ballasts, and
non-dim loads.
Utilize universal 16A continuous-use UL listed dimmer.
Limit current rise time to minimum 350 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load
current waveform and minimum 525 µsec as measured from 0-100 percent of load
current waveform at 50 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.
Current rise to be minimum 400 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load current
waveform and minimum 600 µsec as measured from 0-100 percent of load current
waveform at 100 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.
Load faults only affect the given circuit.
Lutron Circuit Selector Panel Processor:
1.
Provide following capabilities:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
F.
Operate circuits directly from panel processor for system diagnostics and provide
feedback of system operation.
Electronically assign each circuit to any zone in lighting control system.
Determine normal/emergency function of panel and set emergency lighting levels.
Where indicated on Drawings, panels to provide two control links. Each circuit to be
capable of transferring control based on independent programming between architectural
control system and theatrical controls utilizing the USITT DMX-512 1990 or ESTA DMX512A protocol.
React to changes from control within 20 milliseconds.
Diagnostics and Service:
1.
2.
3.
Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of system or processor.
Dimmers/relays: Include diagnostic LEDs to verify proper operation and assist in system
troubleshooting.
Dimming/relay panels: Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component failure
that minimizes loss of control for occupant.
a.
b.
c.
2.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
If lighting control system fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel processor
provides local control of lights until system is repaired.
If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can be
used to turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of lights until
panel processor is repaired.
If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each dimmer
to be mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching
operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.
POWER INTERFACES
A.
Product: PHPM-PA-DV, PHPM-PA-120, PHPM-3F-DV, PHPM-3F-120, PHPM-SW-DV, PHPMWBX-DV, PHPM-WBX-DV.
B.
Electrical:
1.
Phase independent of control input.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
C.
2.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 508.
Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of system
or processor.
LIGHTING CONTROL MODULE ENERGI SAVR NODE
A.
Product: Softswitch ESN: QSN-4S16-S and 0-10V ESN: QSN-4T16-S
B.
Mechanical:
1.
2.
3.
Listed to UL 508as industrial control equipment.
Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel.
Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
C.
Surface mounted
D.
Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 25,000A.
E.
Switching:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is
applied to and removed from load circuits.
Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of up to 16
amps, of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast, electronic fluorescent
ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage, neon/cold
cathode and motor loads).
Connection without interface to wired:
1.
2.
Occupancy sensors
Daylight sensors
G.
Connects to Lighting Management Panel via RS485.
H.
Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.
I.
LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, and IR
receivers.
J.
Contact Closure Input
1.
Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or solid-state output
without interface to:
a.
b.
K.
Activate scenes
Enable or disable timeclock
Emergency Contact Closure Input
1.
Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input from
UL 924 Listed Emergency Lighting Interface, security system or fire alarm system
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
3.
L.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Allow configurable zone response during emergency state.
Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.
Low Voltage Dimming Module
1.
2.
Product: QSN-4T16-S
Meet the following requirements:
a.
b.
Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay: Capable
of being electronically linked to single zone.
Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:
1)
0-10V analog voltage signal.
a)
b)
2.7
Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC
60929.
Sink current via IEC 60929.
POWER MODULES GRAFIK Eye QS
A.
Preset lighting control with zone override:
1.
2.
3.
Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.
User-programmable zone and scene names.
Astronomical time clock and programmer interface
a.
Provide access to:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display.
Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.
Integral wide angle infrared receiver.
For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be adjusted
without altering scene values stored in memory.
a.
2.8
Scene selections.
Fade zone to a level.
Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.
Lock out scenes and zones.
Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.
Terminal block for wired infrared signal input.
Enable/disable wall station.
Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal
conforming to IEC 60929; capable of direct (no-interface) control.
LIGHTING MANAGEMENT PANEL
A.
Provide Lighting Management Panel in a pre-assembled NEMA listed enclosure with terminal
blocks listed for field wiring.
B.
Enables Q-Admin Light Management software to control and monitor Power Panels, GRAFIK
Eye QS and SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Lighting Management Panel utilizes Ethernet connectivity to Q-Manager.
a.
Dedicated Network Environment is used to connect Q-Manager with Lighting
Management Panel s.
C.
Integrate control station devices, power panels, shades, preset lighting controls, and external
inputs into single customizable, multiple failsafe lighting control system, operable manually,
automatically or through computer control.
D.
Astronomical time clock.
E.
Maintains a backup of the programming in a non-volatile memory capable of lasting more than
ten years without power.
2.9
LIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPUTER Q-MANAGER
A.
PC/Laptop
1.
2.
3.
B.
Server
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.10
Used for occasional programming, monitoring, and control of digital network lighting
controls.
Computer to be provided by the lighting control system manufacturer.
Computer software preinstalled and tested prior to shipping.
Used for 24 hour per day, 7 day per week programming, monitoring, control, graphics,
and data logging of digital network lighting controls.
Used to handle client machine request in multi-computer systems.
Computer to be provided by the lighting control system manufacturer.
Computer software preinstalled and tested prior to shipping.
LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOFTWARE Q-ADMIN
A.
Provide system software license and hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and
warranted by a single manufacturer.
B.
Configuration Setup
1.
2.
3.
Used to make system programming and configuration changes
Windows based, capable of running on either central server or a remote client over
TCP/IP connection
Allow user to:
a.
Capture system design.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Geographical Layout
Load Schedule Zoning
Equipment Schedule
Equipment assignment to lighting management panels
Daylighting design
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
b.
Define the configuration for the following in each area:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
c.
Lighting Scenes
Control Station Devices
Interface and Integration Equipment
Occupancy/After Hours
Partitioning
Daylighting
Emergency Lighting
Nitelights
Start-up
1)
2)
C.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Addressing
Daylighting
Control and Monitor
1.
Basic System View
a.
2.
Optional Graphical Floorplan View
a.
3.
d.
Area lights can be monitored for on/off status.
All lights in an area can be turned on/off or sent to a specific level.
For areas that have been zoned, these areas may be sent to a predefined lighting
scene, and individual zones may be controlled.
Area lighting scenes can be modified in real-time, changing the levels zones go to
when a scene is activated.
Occupancy
a.
b.
c.
5.
The Q-Admin system navigation and status reporting is performed using
customized CAD based drawings of your building. Pan and Zoom feature allows
for easy navigation. Basic system view is always available. Contact Lutron for
custom pricing.
Control of Lights & Shades
a.
b.
c.
4.
The Q-Admin system navigation and status reporting is performed using a tree
view of the building.
Area occupancy can be monitored.
Area occupancy can be disabled to override occupancy control or in case of
occupancy sensor problems.
Area occupancy settings including level lights turn on to when area is occupied,
and level lights turn off to when area is unoccupied can be changed in real-time.
Daylighting
a.
b.
Daylighting can be enabled/disabled. This can be used to override the control
currently taking place in the space.
Daylight target levels can be changed for each daylit area. This is particularly
useful when new departments move into a space.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 11
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
6.
Load Shedding
a.
7.
b.
c.
d.
b.
c.
12.
Diagnostics allows the building manager to check on the status of all equipment in
the lighting control system. Devices will be listed with a reporting status of OK,
missing, or unknown.
Administration
a.
11.
Energy Reports – Show a comparison of cumulative energy used over a period of
time for one or more areas.
Power Reports – Show power usage trend over a period of time for one or more
areas.
Activity Report – Shows what activity has taken place over a period of time for one
or more areas.
Activity includes occupant activities (i.e. areas going
occupied/unoccupied, wall controls being pressed), building manager operation
(controlling/changing areas using the control & monitor tool), and device failures
(keypads, ballasts, etc. not responding).
Lamp Failure Report – Shows which areas are currently reporting lamp failures.
Diagnostics
a.
10.
Schedule time of day and astronomic timeclock events to automate functions for
lights and shades.
Reporting allow the building manager to gather real-time and historical information about
the system as follows:
a.
9.
Load shedding allows the building manager to monitor whole building lighting
power usage and apply a load shed reduction to selected areas, thereby reducing
a building’s power usage.
Scheduling
a.
8.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Users – Allows new user accounts to be created and existing user accounts to be
edited.
Publish Graphical Floorplan – Allows admin user to publish new graphical floorplan
files, allowing users to monitor the status of lights, occupancy of areas, and
daylighting status.
Back-up Project Database – Allows admin user to backup the project database.
The project database holds all the configuration information for the system,
including keypad programming, area scenes, daylighting, occupancy
programming, emergency levels, night lights, and timeclock. The Control and
Monitor tool can be used to adjust some of these settings, and thus it is important
to back-up the project database prior to changing settings in the Design and Setup
tool.
Publish Project Database – Allows the admin user to send a new project database to the
server and download the new configuration to the system. The project database holds all
the configuration information for the system, including keypad programming, area
scenes, daylighting, occupancy programming, emergency levels, night lights, and
timeclock.
Hardware
a.
Independent operation of solar tracking program through non-windows based
operating system provided in one or more Quantum light management panels.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 12
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
13.
User Interface
a.
PC Graphic User Interface
1)
b.
2)
A.
User Interface will provide access to all adjustable parameters of solar depth
of penetration and number of shade movements per day
Manual Override
1)
2.11
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Temporary override of the control program shall be capable through optional
manual keypads.
Keypads shall be capable of providing manual control of shades in a
particular area.
LOW-VOLTAGE WALL STATIONS
System Wall Stations
1.
2.
3.
Allows controls of any devices part of the Lutron System.
Product: seeTouch and Preset Lighting Controls with Zone Override.
Electronics:
a.
4.
Functionality:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
8.
9.
Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate.
LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button
press was properly processed or the LEDs turn off if the button press was not
processed.
Allow for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.
Color:
a.
b.
c.
6.
7.
Use RS485 wiring for low voltage communication.
Match NEMA WD1, Section 2.
Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units.
Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light
sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.
Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.
Engrave wall stations in English with appropriate button, zone, and scene engraving
descriptions.
Silk-screened borders, logos, and graduations to use graphic process that chemically
bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by scratching and cleaning.
Software Configuration:
a.
Customizable control station device button functionality:
1)
2)
Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined action.
Buttons can be programmed to perform defined action on press and defined
action on release.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 13
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
10.
Control station device LEDs to support logic that defines when it is illuminated:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.12
A.
Contact Closure Interface; Lutron Model QSE-IO:
2.
The contact closure input device will accept both momentary and maintained contact
closures.
The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs.
RS232 and Ethernet Interface; Lutron Model QSE-CI-NWK-E
1.
2.
Provide ability to communicate via ethernet or RS232 to audiovisual equipment,
touchscreens, etc.
Provide control of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
A.
Lights scene selections.
Shade Group Presets.
Fine-tuning of shade preset or light scenes levels with raise/lower.
Simulate system wall station button presses and releases.
Provide status monitoring of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.13
Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels).
Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
Pathway (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
Last scene (logic is true when spaces are in defined scenes).
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES
1.
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Light scene-status.
Shade Group status.
Wall station button presses and releases.
Wall station LEDs.
SENSORS
Ceiling and Wall Mount Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors
1.
2.
Product: LOS-CDT-2000R-WH
Sensing mechanism:
a.
b.
c.
Infrared: Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust
and residue build-up.
Ultrasonic: Utilize an operating frequency of 32kHz or 40kHz that shall be crystal
controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.
Dual technology:
1)
2)
Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and
residue build-up.
Utilize an operating frequency of 32kHz or 40kHz that shall be crystal
controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 14
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Sensors shall turn off or reduce lighting automatically after reasonable time delay when a
room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space
Sensor shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours
and habits.
Sensors shall be UL.
Sensors shall be fully adaptive and adjust their sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal
lighting control for any use of the space
Sensors shall have field adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to override any
adaptive features.
Power failure memory:
a.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Controls incorporate non-volatile memory. Should power be interrupted and
subsequently restored, settings and learned parameters saved in protected
memory shall not be lost.
Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.
Sensors shall be Class 2 devices.
Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket for all Ceiling mount sensors.
Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas for all ceiling mounted
sensors using infrared technology.
Provide swivel mount base for all wall mount sensors.
Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and
Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options.
Sensor Power Packs
1.
2.
3.
C.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
For ease of mounting, installation and future service, power pack(s) shall be able to
mount through a 1/2" knock-out in a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated,
self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a
transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide power to a minimum
of three (3) sensors.
Power pack shall be plenum rated
Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class 2, 18-24 AWG, stranded
U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums,
where applicable
Interior Daylight Sensors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication
Can be replaced without reprogramming
Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme
Stable output over temperature from 0º to 40º C
Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture lighting
and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection
Provide linear response from 0 to 500 foot-candles
Integral IR receiver for personal control
Constructed with plastic meeting UL94 HB
Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles
Constructed via sonic welding
Color:
a.
b.
c.
Match NEMA WD1, Section 2 White
Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units
Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light
sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 15
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
D.
Exterior Daylight Sensors
1.
2.
2.14
A.
Calibrated with independent turn-on and turn-off thresholds; minimum 2 foot-candles
difference between the turn-on and turn-off thresholds.
Enclosed in weatherproof housing with shading and lens protection visor.
ACCESSORIES
Emergency Lighting Interface; Lutron LUT-ELI
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.15
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Provides total system listing to UL924 when used with Lutron Quantum system.
Senses all three phases of building power.
Provides an output to power panels or Digital Ballast Interfaces if power on any phase
fails and sends all lights controlled by these devices to 100 percent intensity. Lights to
return to their previous intensities when normal power is restored.
Accepts a contact closure input from a fire alarm control panel.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform full-function testing on all completed assemblies at end of line. Statistical sampling is
not acceptable.
B.
Audit burn-in at 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) ambient temperature of dimming assemblies and
panels at full load for two hours.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B.
Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents.
C.
Provide dedicated network between Q-Manager computer and Quantum Lighting Management
Panels.
D.
Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any additional
equipment required to provide control intent.
E.
Define each dimmer's/relay’s load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions.
F.
Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight.
G.
Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light sources; ceiling
mounted and fixture-mounted daylight sensors shall not have direct view of luminaries.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 16
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SERVICE AND SUPPORT
A.
Startup and Programming
1.
Provide factory certified field service engineer to make minimum of three site visits to
ensure proper system installation and operation under following parameters
a.
Qualifications for factory certified field service engineer:
1)
2)
b.
Make first visit prior to installation of wiring. Review:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
c.
Low voltage wiring requirements.
Separation of power and low voltage/data wiring.
Wire labeling.
Lighting Management Panel locations and installations.
Control locations.
Computer jack locations.
Load circuit wiring.
Network wiring requirements.
Connections to other equipment and other Lutron equipment.
Installer responsibilities.
Power Panel locations.
Make second visit upon completion of installation of Network Lighting Control
System:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
d.
Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.
Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the system installed.
Verify connection of power wiring and load circuits.
Verify connection and location of controls.
Energize Lighting Management Panels and download system data program.
Address devices.
Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address
panel.
Download system panel data to dimming/switching panels
Check dimming panel load types and currents and supervise removal of bypass jumpers.
Verify system operation control by control.
Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.
Verify proper operation of manufacturers supplied PC and installed
programs.
Configure initial groupings of ballast for wall controls, daylight sensors and
occupant sensors.
Initial calibration of sensors.
Obtain sign-off on system functions.
Make third visit to demonstrate and educate Owner’s representative on system
capabilities, operation and maintenance.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 17
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
Startup
a.
Q-Admin configuration
1)
B.
Configuration Software used to make system programming and configuration changes
Control and Monitor
Tech Support
1.
3.3
Naming and association of areas and lighting zones.
Training of customer representatives for Q-Admin.
1.
2.
C.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
Training Visit (LSC-TRAINING)
1.
3.4
Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide 1 day additional on-site system training
to site personnel.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United
States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.
B.
Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual
training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of system startup.
END OF SECTION 260943
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
260943 - 18
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 261200 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of transformers with medium-voltage primaries:
1.
1.3
Dry-type distribution and power transformers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, location of each field connection, and performance
for each type and size of transformer indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power signal and control wiring.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
Underground primary and secondary conduit stub-up location.
Dimensioned concrete base, outline of transformer, and required clearances.
Ground rod and grounding cable locations.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C.
Source quality-control test reports.
D.
Follow-up service reports.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined
by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B.
Product Options:
Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
transformers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Comply with IEEE C2.
E.
Comply with ANSI C57.12.10, ANSI C57.12.28, IEEE C57.12.70, and IEEE C57.12.80.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Store transformers protected from weather and so condensation will not form on or in units.
Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B.
Coordinate installation of louvers, doors, spill retention areas, and sumps. Coordinate
installation so no piping or conduits are installed in space allocated for medium-voltage
transformers except those directly associated with transformers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Acme Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division.
Cooper Industries; Cooper Power Systems Division.
Cutler-Hammer.
Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp.
GE Electrical Distribution & Control.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
Uptegraff, R. E. Mfg. Co.
DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS
A.
Description: NEMA ST 20, IEEE C57.12.01, ANSI C57.12.51 ANSI C57.12.52, UL 1562 listed
and labeled, dry-type, 2-winding transformers.
1.
Indoor, ventilated Totally enclosed, nonventilated, cast coil/encapsulated coil, with
primary and secondary windings individually cast in epoxy; with insulation system rated at
185 deg C with an 80 deg C average winding temperature rise above a maximum
ambient temperature of 40 deg C.
B.
Primary Connection:
switchgear.
C.
Secondary Connection:
switchgear.
D.
Insulation Materials: IEEE C57.12.01, rated at 220 deg C.
E.
Insulation Temperature Rise: 115 deg C, maximum rise above 40 deg C.
F.
Basic Impulse Level: 110 kV.
G.
Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated primary
voltage.
H.
Cooling System: Class AA/FA, self-cooled, and with forced-air-cooled rating, complying with
IEEE C57.12.01.
I.
Sound level may not exceed sound levels listed in NEMA TR 1, without fans operating.
J.
High-Temperature Alarm:
contacts for remote alarm.
2.3
Transition terminal compartment with connection pattern to match
Transition terminal compartment with connection pattern to match
Sensor at transformer with local audible and visual alarm and
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
2.4
Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted
with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26
Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for
components. Conduct transformer tests according to ANSI C57.12.51 IEEE C57.12.91.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Factory Tests: Perform the following factory-certified tests on each transformer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Resistance measurements of all windings on rated-voltage connection and on tap
extreme connections.
Ratios on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme connections.
Polarity and phase relation on rated-voltage connection.
No-load loss at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection.
Excitation current at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection.
Impedance and load loss at rated current on rated-voltage connection and on tap
extreme connections.
Applied potential.
Induced potential.
Temperature Test: If transformer is supplied with auxiliary cooling equipment to provide
more than one rating, test at lowest kilovolt-ampere Class OA or Class AA rating and
highest kilovolt-ampere Class OA/FA or Class AA/FA rating.
a.
10.
Temperature test is not required if record of temperature test on an essentially
duplicate unit is available.
Owner will witness all required factory tests. Notify Architect at least 14 days before date
of tests and indicate their approximate duration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for medium-voltage
transformers.
B.
Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:
1.
2.
Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.
Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders will
have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D.
Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance
shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install transformers on concrete bases.
1.
Anchor transformers to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written instructions,
seismic codes at Project, and requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports
for Electrical Systems."
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in
both directions than supported unit and 4 inches high.
Use, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Install dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts, for supported equipment, that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Tack-weld or bolt transformers to channel-iron sills embedded in concrete bases. Install
sills level and grout flush with floor or base.
Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written
instructions and NFPA 70.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.4
Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
After installing transformers but before primary is energized, verify that grounding system
at substation is tested at specified value or less.
After installing transformers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D.
Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following:
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
FOLLOW-UP SERVICE
A.
Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: If requested by Owner, perform the following voltage
monitoring after Substantial Completion but not more than six months after Final Acceptance:
1.
2.
During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Owner, perform seven days of
three-phase voltage recording at secondary terminals of each transformer. Use
voltmeters with calibration traceable to National Institute of Science and Technology
standards and with a chart speed of not less than 1 inch per hour. Voltage unbalance
greater than 1 percent between phases, or deviation of any phase voltage from nominal
value by more than plus or minus 5 percent during test period, is unacceptable.
Corrective Actions: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective
actions, as appropriate:
a.
b.
3.
4.
B.
Adjust transformer taps.
Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.
Retests:
After corrective actions have been performed, repeat monitoring until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Report: Prepare written report covering monitoring and corrective actions performed.
Infrared Scanning: Perform as specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Switchgear."
END OF SECTION 261200
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 261300 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear with the following optional
components, features, and accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Copper, silver-plated main bus at connection points.
Communication modules.
Analog instruments.
Relays.
Surge arresters.
Provisions for future devices.
Mimic bus.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B.
GFCI: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:
1.
B.
Rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for
individual interrupter switches.
Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and
service space around equipment. Show method of field assembly and location and size
of each field connection. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.
Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,
and weights of each assembled section.
Drawing of cable termination compartments showing preferred locations for
conduits and indicating space available for cable terminations.
Floor plan drawing showing locations for anchor bolts and leveling channels.
Current ratings of buses.
Short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchgear assembly.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
g.
h.
i.
2.
Nameplate legends.
Mimic-bus diagram.
Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
Wiring Diagrams:
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the
Power, signal, and control wiring.
Three-line diagrams of current and future secondary circuits showing device
terminal numbers and internal diagrams.
Schematic control diagrams.
Diagrams showing connections of component devices and equipment.
Schematic diagrams showing connections to remote devices.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances,
and required area above and around switchgear where piping and ducts are prohibited. Show
switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and
mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
Identify field measurements.
D.
Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color charts
showing colors available for mimic bus.
E.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F.
Source quality-control test reports.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and switchgear components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.5
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of switchgear and associated components through one
source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E.
Comply with IEEE C2.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated.
B.
Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.
C.
If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from weather,
dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable
materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent
condensation.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere
ratings for the following conditions:
1.
Ambient temperature not exceeding 140 deg F.
B.
Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide
pathway for moving switchgear into place.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space:
Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchgear, including clearances between switchgear and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction
including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for
workspace and equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.
requirements are specified in Division 03.
1.9
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.
Touchup Paint: Three containers of paint matching enclosure finish, each 0.5 pint.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for interrupter switchgear
test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include the following:
1.
2.
Extension rails, lifting device, transport or dockable dolly or mobile lift, and all other items
necessary to remove circuit breaker from housing and transport to remote location.
Racking handle to move circuit breaker manually between connected and disconnected
positions, and a secondary test coupler to permit testing of circuit breaker without
removal from switchgear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Description: Factory assembled and tested, and complying with IEEE C37.20.1.
B.
Ratings: Suitable for application in 3-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded-neutral system.
C.
System Voltage: 34.5 kV nominal; 38 kV maximum.
2.3
SUBSTATION METAL-ENCLOSED INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
S&C Electric Company.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
B.
Comply with IEEE C37.20.3.
C.
Comply with IEEE C37.20.7. Provide arc-resistant switchgear, Type 1.
D.
Design Level of Available-Source Fault Current: Integrated short-circuit rating consistent with
value of fault current indicated.
E.
Ratings: Comply with standard ratings designated in IEEE C37.20.3 for maximum-rated voltage
specified.
F.
Interrupter Switches: Stationary, gang operated, and suitable for application at maximum shortcircuit rating of integrated switchgear assembly.
1.
2.
Rating: as indicated continuous duty and load break.
Duty-Cycle, Fault Closing: 40,000 asymmetrical A.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
4.
5.
6.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Switch Action: No external arc and no significant quantities of ionized gas released into
the enclosure.
Switch Construction: Supported entirely by interior framework of structure, with copper
switchblades and stored-energy operating mechanism.
Phase Barriers: Full length of switchblades and fuses for each pole; designed for easy
removal; allow visual inspection of switch components if barrier is in place.
Protective Shields: Cover live components and terminals.
G.
Mechanical Interlock: Prevent opening switch compartment door unless switchblades are open,
and prevent closing switch if door is open.
H.
Window: Permit viewing switchblade positions if door is closed.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Indoor Enclosure: Steel.
B.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray finish over rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated
metal surfaces.
C.
Bus Transition Unit: Arranged to suit bus and adjacent units.
D.
Incoming-Line Unit: Arranged to suit incoming line.
E.
Outgoing Feeder Units: Arranged to suit distribution feeders.
F.
Utility Metering Compartment: Arranged to suit utility meters, relays, controls, and auxiliary
equipment; isolated from medium-voltage components.
G.
Auxiliary Compartments: Arranged to suit house meters, relays, controls, and auxiliary
equipment; isolated from medium-voltage components.
2.5
COMPONENTS
A.
Main Bus: Copper, silver plated at connection points; full length of switchgear.
B.
Ground Bus: Copper, silver plated or copper, tin plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches; full
length of switchgear.
C.
Bus Insulation: Covered with flame-retardant insulation.
D.
Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.
1.
2.
E.
Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of
0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
Current Transformers: Burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters,
and instruments.
Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or fourwire systems, listed and labeled by an NRTL, and with the following features:
1.
Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated
to 600 V.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
Switch-selectable digital display with the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
3.
4.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus
or minus 2 percent.
Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours, plus or minus 2 percent; stored values
unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
Communications module suitable for remote monitoring of meter quantities and functions.
Interface communication and metering requirements according to Division 26 Section
"Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
Mounting: Display and control unit that is flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
F.
Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, integrated digital type; with test blocks and plugs.
G.
Surge Arresters: Distribution class, metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply with NEMA LA 1.
1.
2.
Install in cable termination compartments in each phase of circuit.
Coordinate rating with circuit voltage.
H.
Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports,
necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.
I.
Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplies 120-V control circuits through
secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:
1.
2.
Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including
primary and secondary fuses.
Two control power transformers in separate compartments with necessary interlocking
relays; each transformer connected to line side of associated main circuit breaker.
a.
3.
J.
Secondary windings connected through relay(s) to control bus to affect an
automatic transfer scheme.
Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses provide current-limiting and overload
protection.
Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying
with the following:
1.
2.
Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Materials: Refer to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify units,
devices, controls, and wiring.
B.
Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus applied to front of switchgear, arranged in single-line
diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved final mimicbus diagram.
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to
produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and
connections.
Medium: Painted graphics, as approved.
Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; selected by Architect.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Before shipment of equipment, perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
B.
Assemble switchgear and equipment in manufacturer's plant and perform the following:
1.
2.
C.
Functional tests of all relays, instruments, meters, and control devices by application of
secondary three-phase voltage to voltage circuits and injection of current in current
transformer secondary circuits.
Functional test of all control and trip circuits. Connect test devices into circuits to
simulate operation of controlled remote equipment such as circuit-breaker trip coils, close
coils, and auxiliary contacts. Test proper operation of relay targets.
Prepare equipment for shipment.
1.
2.
2.8
Production tests on circuit breakers according to ANSI C37.09.
Production tests on completed switchgear assembly according to IEEE C37.20.2.
Provide suitable crating, blocking, and supports so equipment will withstand expected
domestic shipping and handling shocks and vibration.
Weatherproof equipment for shipment. Close connection openings to prevent entrance
of foreign material during shipment and storage.
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard color finish applied to equipment before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchgear for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
INSTALLATION
A.
Anchor switchgear assembly to 4-inch, channel-iron sill embedded in concrete base and attach
by bolting.
1.
2.
B.
3.3
Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into concrete base.
Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no less
than 3 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear, unless
otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. Construct concrete
bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Diagram and Instructions:
1.
Frame under clear acrylic plastic on front of switchgear.
a.
b.
2.
3.4
Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control
and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution
components, and major loads.
Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of maintenance manual.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Cable terminations at switchgear are specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables."
B.
Tighten bus joints, electrical connectors, and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Sections "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables" and "Medium-Voltage Cables."
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Inspect switchgear, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test
and adjust components and equipment.
Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of automatic power
factor correction units.
Report results in writing.
C.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
D.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of
the following NETA categories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Switchgear.
Circuit breakers.
Protective relays.
Instrument transformers.
Metering and instrumentation.
Ground-fault systems.
Battery systems.
Surge arresters.
Capacitors.
E.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
F.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each switchgear. Remove front and rear panels so joints
and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear
checked and that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
CLEANING
A.
3.7
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Vacuum dirt and
debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair damaged finishes.
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature
and humidity within manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.8
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION 261300
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 261301 - SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
The switchgear shall be in accordance with the one-line diagram, and shall conform to the following specification.
B.
The switchgear shall consist of a gas-tight tank containing SF 6 gas, load-interrupter switches
and resettable vacuum fault interrupters with visible open gaps and integral visible grounds, and
a microprocessor-based overcurrent control. Load-interrupter switch terminals shall be
equipped with bushings rated 600 amperes continuous, and fault-interrupter terminals shall be
equipped with bushing wells rated 200 amperes continuous or bushings rated 600 amperes
continuous (as specified) to provide for elbow connection. Manual operating mechanisms and
viewing windows shall be located on the opposite side of the tank from the bushings and
bushing wells so that operating personnel shall not be required to perform any routine
operations in close proximity to high-voltage elbows and cables.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RATINGS
A.
The ratings for the integrated switchgear shall be as designated below.
Frequency, Hz ........................................................... 60
kV, Maximum .......................................................... 34.5
kV, BIL
.................................................................. 150
Main Bus Continuous, Amperes .............................. 600
Three-Pole Load-Interrupter Switches
Continuous, Amperes ............................................ 600
Load Dropping, Amperes ....................................... 600
Ten-Time Duty-Cycle Fault-Closing,
Amperes RMS Symmetrical.............................. 12,500
Amperes, Peak ................................................. 32,500
Fault Interrupters
Continuous, Amperes ............................................ 200
Load Dropping, Amperes ....................................... 200
Ten-Time Duty-Cycle Fault Interrupting,
Amperes RMS Symmetrical.............................. 12,500
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Ten-Time Duty-Cycle Fault-Closing,
Amperes RMS Symmetrical............................. 12,500
Amperes, Peak ................................................. 32,500
Short-Circuit Rating
Amperes, RMS Symmetrical ............................ 12,500
2.2
CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
A.
The manufacturer of the switchgear shall be completely and solely responsible for the
performance of the load-interrupter switch and fault interrupter as well as the complete
integrated assembly as rated.
B.
The manufacturer shall furnish, upon request, certification of ratings of the load-interrupter
switch, fault interrupter, and the integrated switchgear assembly consisting of switches and fault
interrupters in combination with the gas-tight tank.
2.3
COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS AND CODES
A.
The switchgear shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following standards and codes:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
The applicable portions of ANSI C57.12.28, covering enclosure integrity for pad-mounted
equipment.
The applicable portions of ANSI C37.71, ANSI C37.72, ANSI C37.73, IEC 56, and IEC
265-1 (Class A), which specify test procedures and sequences for the load-interrupter
switches, fault interrupters, and the complete switchgear assembly.
The applicable portions of IEC 298, Appendix AA covering arc resistance, through 12.5
kA for 15 cycles.
CONSTRUCTION
A.
SF 6 -Gas Insulation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
The SF 6 gas shall conform to ASTM D2472.
The switchgear shall be filled with SF 6 gas to a pressure of 7 psig at 68º F.
The gas-tight tank shall be evacuated prior to filling with SF 6 gas to minimize moisture in
the tank.
The switchgear shall withstand system voltage at a gas pressure of 0 psig at 68º F.
A gas-fill valve shall be provided.
A temperature-compensated pressure gauge shall be provided that is color coded to
show the operating range. The gauge shall be mounted inside the gas-tight tank (visible
through a large viewing window) to provide consistent pressure readings regardless of
the temperature or altitude at the installation site.
Gas-Tight Tank
1.
2.
3.
The tank shall be submersible and able to withstand up to 10 feet of water over the base.
The tank shall be of welded construction and shall be made of 7-gauge mild steel or Type
304 stainless steel, as specified in Section IV.
A means of lifting the tank shall be provided.
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
C.
Gas-Tight Tank Finish (for mild steel only)
1.
2.
To remove oils and dirt, to form a chemically and anodically neutral conversion coating to
improve the finish-to-metal bond, and to retard underfilm propagation of corrosion, mildsteel surfaces shall undergo a thorough pretreatment process comprised of a fully
automated system of cleaning, rinsing, phosphatizing, sealing, drying, and cooling, before
any protective coatings are applied. By utilizing an automated pretreatment process, the
mild-steel surfaces of the gas-tight tank shall receive a highly consistent thorough
treatment, eliminating fluctuations in reaction time, reaction temperature, and chemical
concentrations.
After pretreatment, protective coatings shall be applied that shall help resist corrosion
and protect the mild-steel surfaces of the gas-tight tank. To establish the capability to
resist corrosion and protect the mild steel, representative test specimens coated by the
manufacturer’s finishing system shall satisfactorily pass the following tests:
a.
1500 hours of exposure to salt-spray testing per ASTM B 117 with:
1)
2)
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
D.
Underfilm corrosion not to extend more than 1/32” from the scribe as
evaluated per ASTM D 1645, Procedure A, Method 2 (scraping); and
Loss of adhesion from bare metal not to extend more than 1/8” from the
scribe.
1000 hours of humidity testing per ASTM D 4585 using the Cleveland Condensing
Type Humidity Cabinet with no blistering as evaluated per ASTM D 714.
Crosshatch adhesion testing per ASTM D 3359 Method B with no loss of finish.
Certified test abstracts substantiating the above capabilities shall be furnished
upon request.
The finish shall be inspected for scuffs and scratches. Blemishes shall be touched up by
hand to restore the protective integrity of the finish.
The finish shall be indoor light gray, satisfying the requirements of ANSI Standard Z55.1
for No. 61.
Viewing Windows
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Each load-interrupter switch shall be provided with a large viewing window at least
6 inches by 12 inches to allow visual verification of the switch-blade position (open,
closed, and grounded) while shining a flashlight on the blades.
Each fault interrupter shall be provided with a large viewing window at least 6 inches by
12 inches to allow visual verification of the disconnect-blade position (open, closed, and
grounded) while shining a flashlight on the blades.
Viewing windows shall be located on the opposite side of the gear from the bushings and
bushing wells so that operating personnel shall not be required to perform any routine
operations in close proximity to high-voltage elbows and cables.
A cover shall be provided for each viewing window to prevent operating personnel from
viewing the flash which may occur during switching operations.
High-Voltage Bus
1.
2.
Bus and interconnections shall withstand the stresses associated with short-circuit currents up through the maximum rating of the switchgear.
Before installation of aluminum bus, all electrical contact surfaces shall first be prepared
by machine abrading to remove any oxide film. Immediately after this operation, the
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
electrical contact surfaces shall be coated with a uniform coating of an oxide inhibitor and
sealant.
F.
Provisions for Grounding
1.
2.
G.
Terminations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Terminals for load-interrupter switches shall have 600-ampere bushings, and terminals
for fault interrupters shall have 200-ampere bushing wells to permit connection of elbows.
Bushings and bushing wells shall be located on one side of the gear to reduce the
required operating clearance.
Terminals for fault interrupters shall be equipped with 600-ampere bushings.
Bushings rated 600 amperes continuous shall be provided without a threaded stud.
Terminals for load-interrupter switches shall be equipped with 200-ampere bushing wells.
Bushings and Bushing Wells
1.
2.
3.
2.5
One ground-connection pad shall be provided on the gas-tight tank of the switchgear.
The ground-connection pad shall be constructed of stainless steel and welded to the gastight tank, and shall have a short-circuit rating equal to that of the switchgear.
Bushings and bushing wells shall conform to ANSI/IEEE Standard 386 (ANSI Standard
C119.2).
Bushings and bushing wells shall include a semiconductive coating.
Bushings and bushing wells shall be mounted in such a way that the semiconductive
coating is solidly grounded to the gas-tight tank.
BASIC COMPONENTS
A.
Load-Interrupter Switches
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
The three-phase, gang-operated load-interrupter switches shall have a ten-time dutycycle fault-closing rating equal to or exceeding the short-circuit rating of the switchgear.
This rating defines the ability to close the switch ten times against a three-phase fault
with asymmetrical (peak) current in at least one phase equal to the rated value, with the
switch remaining operable and able to carry and interrupt rated current. Certified test
abstracts establishing such ratings shall be furnished upon request.
The switch shall be provided with an integral ground position that is readily visible
through the viewing window to eliminate the need for cable handling and exposure to
high voltage to ground the equipment.
The ground position shall have a ten-time duty-cycle fault-closing rating.
The switch shall be provided with an open position that is readily visible through the
viewing window to eliminate the need for cable handling and exposure to high voltage to
establish a visible gap.
The open gaps of the switch shall be sized to allow cable testing through a feedthru
bushing or the back of the elbow.
Fault Interrupters
1.
Fault interrupters shall have a ten-time duty-cycle fault-closing and fault interrupting
rating equal to or exceeding the short-circuit rating of the switchgear. This rating defines
the fault interrupter’s ability to close ten times against a three-phase fault with asymmetrical (peak) current in at least one phase equal to the rated value and clear the resulting
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
fault current, with the interrupter remaining operable and able to carry and interrupt rated
current. Certified test abstracts establishing such ratings shall be furnished upon request.
The fault interrupter shall be provided with a disconnect with an integral ground position
that is readily visible through the viewing window to eliminate the need for cable handling
and exposure to high voltage to ground the equipment.
The ground position shall have a ten-time duty-cycle fault-closing rating.
The disconnect shall be provided with an open position that is readily visible through the
viewing window to eliminate the need for cable handling and exposure to high voltage to
establish a visible gap.
The open gaps of the disconnect shall be sized to allow cable testing through a feedthru
bushing or the back of the elbow.
An internal indicator shall be provided for each fault interrupter to show when it is in the
tripped condition. The indicator shall be clearly visible through the viewing window.
Operating Mechanisms
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Load-interrupter switches and fault interrupters shall be operated by means of a quickmake, quick-break mechanism.
The manual handle shall charge the operating mechanism for opening, closing, and
grounding of the switches and fault interrupters.
Operating mechanisms shall be equipped with an operation selector to prevent inadvertent operation from the closed position directly to the grounded position, or from the
grounded position directly to the closed position. The operation selector shall require
physical movement to the proper position to permit the next operation.
Operating shafts shall be padlockable in any position to prevent operation.
The operation selector shall be padlockable to prevent operation to the grounded position.
The operating mechanism shall indicate switch position which shall be clearly visible from
the normal operating position.
Overcurrent Control
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
A microprocessor-based overcurrent control shall be provided to initiate fault interruption.
The control shall be capable of single-pole or three-pole tripping of each fault interrupter.
The control shall be mounted in a watertight enclosure and shall be removable in the field
without taking the gear out of service.
Control settings shall be field programmable using a personal computer connected via a
data port to the control. The data port shall be accessible from the exterior of the enclosure.
Power and sensing for the control shall be supplied by integral current transformers.
The minimum total clearing time (from initiation of the fault to total clearing) for fault
interruption shall be 40 milliseconds (2.4 cycles) at 60 hertz or 44 milliseconds (2.2
cycles) at 50 hertz.
The control shall feature time-current characteristic (TCC) curves including standard
E-speed, coordinating-speed tap, and coordinating-speed main curves. Coordinatingspeed tap curves shall optimize coordination with load-side weak-link/backup currentlimiting fuse combinations, and coordinating-speed main curves shall optimize coordination with tap-interrupter curves.
The standard E-speed curve shall have phase-overcurrent settings ranging from 25E
through 200E. The coordinating-speed tap curve shall have phase-overcurrent and independent ground-overcurrent settings ranging from 50 amperes through 400 amperes.
The coordinating-speed main curve shall have phase-overcurrent and independent
ground-overcurrent settings ranging from 100 amperes through 800 amperes.
The control shall have instantaneous-trip (1 kA through 8 kA) and definite-time delay
(32 ms through 96 ms) settings to allow tailoring of the coordinating-speed tap and coordinating-speed main curves to the application.
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
E.
Optional Voltage Indication (Select voltage indication or voltage indication with provisions for
low-voltage phasing.)
1.
Voltage indication
a.
b.
2.
Voltage indication for each load-interrupter switch and fault interrupter by means of
capacitive taps on the bushings shall be provided to eliminate the need for cable
handling and exposure to high voltage to test the cables for voltage. This feature
shall include a flashing LCD display to indicate the presence of voltage for each
phase, and a solar panel to supply power for testing of the complete voltageindication circuit.
The voltage-indication feature shall be mounted on the covers for the viewing
windows on the opposite side of the gear from the bushings and bushing wells so
that operating personnel shall not be required to perform any routine operations in
close proximity to high-voltage elbows and cables.
Voltage indication with provisions for low-voltage phasing
a.
b.
2.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Voltage indication with provisions for low-voltage phasing for each load-interrupter
switch and fault interrupter by means of capacitive taps on the bushings shall be
provided to eliminate the need for cable handling and exposure to high voltage to
test the cables for voltage and phasing. This feature shall include a flashing LCD
display to indicate the presence of voltage for each phase, and a solar panel to
supply power for testing of the complete voltage-indication circuit and phasing
circuit.
The voltage-indication feature shall be mounted on the covers for the viewing
windows on the opposite side of the gear from the bushings and bushing wells so
that operating personnel shall not be required to perform any routine operations in
close proximity to high-voltage elbows and cables.
SWITCHGEAR STYLE
A.
Pad-Mounted Style
1.
2.
3.
The gas-tight tank shall be made of 7-gauge mild-steel.
To guard against corrosion due to extremely harsh environmental conditions, the gastight tank shall be made of Type 304 stainless steel.
Enclosure
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
The switchgear shall be provided with a pad-mounted enclosure suitable for
installation of the gear on a concrete pad.
The pad-mounted enclosure shall be separable from the switchgear to allow clear
access to the bushings and bushing wells for cable termination.
The basic material shall be 14-gauge hot-rolled, pickled, and oiled steel sheet.
The enclosure shall be provided with removable front and back panels, and hinged
lift-up roof sections for access to the operating and termination compartments.
Each roof section shall have a retainer to hold it in the open position.
Lift-up roof sections shall overlap the panels and shall have provisions for padlocking that incorporate a means to protect the padlock shackle from tampering.
The base shall consist of continuous 90-degree flanges, turned inward and welded
at the corners, for bolting to the concrete pad.
Panel openings shall have 90-degree flanges, facing outward, that shall provide
strength and rigidity as well as deep overlapping between panels and panel
openings to guard against water entry.
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
4.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
For bushings rated 600 amperes continuous, the termination compartment shall be
of an adequate depth to accommodate encapsulated surge arresters mounted on
600-ampere elbows having 200-ampere interfaces.
For bushing wells rated 200 amperes continuous, the termination compartment
shall be of an adequate depth to accommodate 200-ampere elbows mounted on
feedthru inserts.
An instruction manual holder shall be provided.
Non-removable lifting tabs shall be provided.
To guard against corrosion due to extremely harsh environmental conditions, the
entire exterior of the enclosure shall be fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel.
Enclosure Finish
a.
b.
c.
All exterior welded seams shall be filled and sanded smooth for neat appearance.
To remove oils and dirt, to form a chemically and anodically neutral conversion
coating to improve the finish-to-metal bond, and to retard underfilm propagation of
corrosion, all surfaces shall undergo a thorough pretreatment process comprised
of a fully automated system of cleaning, rinsing, phosphatizing, sealing, drying,
and cooling, before any protective coatings are applied. By utilizing an automated
pretreatment process, the enclosure shall receive a highly consistent thorough
treatment, eliminating fluctuations in reaction time, reaction temperature, and
chemical concentrations.
After pretreatment, protective coatings shall be applied that shall help resist
corrosion and protect the steel enclosure. To establish the capability to resist
corrosion and protect the enclosure, representative test specimens coated by the
manufacturer’s finishing system shall satisfactorily pass the following tests:
1)
4000 hours of exposure to salt-spray testing per ASTM B 117 with:
a)
b)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
d.
e.
f.
Underfilm corrosion not to extend more than 1/32” from the scribe as
evaluated per ASTM D 1645, Procedure A, Method 2 (scraping); and
Loss of adhesion from bare metal not to extend more than 1/8” from
the scribe.
1000 hours of humidity testing per ASTM D 4585 using the Cleveland
Condensing Type Humidity Cabinet with no blistering as evaluated per
ASTM D 714.
500 hours of accelerated weathering testing per ASTM G 53 using lamp
UVB-313 with no chalking as evaluated per ASTM D 659, and no more than
10% reduction of gloss as evaluated per ASTM D 523.
Crosshatch adhesion testing per ASTM D 3359 Method B with no loss of
finish.
160-inch-pound impact adhesion testing per ASTM D 2794 with no chipping
or cracking.
Oil resistance testing consisting of a 72-hour immersion bath in mineral oil
with no shift in color, no streaking, no blistering, and no loss of hardness.
3000 cycles of abrasion testing per ASTM 4060 with no penetration to the
substrate.
Certified test abstracts substantiating the above capabilities shall be
furnished upon request.
The finish shall be inspected for scuffs and scratches. Blemishes shall be touched
up by hand to restore the protective integrity of the finish.
The finish shall be olive green, Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5.
The finish shall be outdoor light gray, satisfying the requirements of ANSI Standard
Z55.1 for No. 70.
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
LABELING
A.
Hazard-Alerting Signs
1.
2.
3.
B.
Nameplates, Ratings Labels, and Connection Diagrams
1.
2.
2.8
The exterior of the pad-mounted enclosure (if furnished) shall be provided with “Warning—Keep Out—Hazardous Voltage Inside—Can Shock, Burn, or Cause Death” signs.
Each unit of switchgear shall be provided with a “Danger—Hazardous Voltage—Failure
to Follow These Instructions Will Likely Cause Shock, Burns, or Death” sign. The text
shall further indicate that operating personnel must know and obey the employer’s work
rules, know the hazards involved, and use proper protective equipment and tools to work
on this equipment.
Each unit of switchgear shall be provided with a “Danger—Keep Away—Hazardous
Voltage—Will Shock, Burn, or Cause Death” sign.
Each unit of switchgear shall be provided with a nameplate indicating the manufacturer’s
name, catalog number, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number.
Each unit of switchgear shall be provided with a ratings label indicating the following:
voltage rating; main bus continuous rating; short-circuit rating; fault-interrupter ratings
including interrupting and duty-cycle fault-closing; and load-interrupter switch ratings
including duty-cycle fault-closing and short-time.
ACCESSORIES
A.
A shotgun clamp stick (6’-51/2”, 8’-51/2”) in length shall be provided complete with a canvas
storage bag.
B.
An adapter cable for connecting an overcurrent control to a user-furnished personal computer
(having a 25-pin or 9-pin serial communication port) in the field shall be provided.
C.
An adapter cable for connecting an overcurrent control removed from its enclosure to a userfurnished personal computer (having a 25-pin or 9-pin serial communication port) in the shop
shall be provided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchgear for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Anchor switchgear assembly to 4-inch, channel-iron sill embedded in concrete base and attach
by bolting.
1.
Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into concrete base.
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
B.
3.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no less
than 3 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear, unless
otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. Construct concrete
bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Diagram and Instructions:
1.
Frame under clear acrylic plastic on front of switchgear.
a.
b.
2.
3.4
Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control
and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution
components, and major loads.
Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of maintenance manual.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Cable terminations at switchgear are specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables."
B.
Tighten bus joints, electrical connectors, and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Sections "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables" and "Medium-Voltage Cables."
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform
the following:
1.
Inspect switchgear, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test
and adjust components and equipment.
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
3.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of automatic power
factor correction units.
Report results in writing.
C.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
D.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of
the following NETA categories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Switchgear.
Circuit breakers.
Protective relays.
Instrument transformers.
Metering and instrumentation.
Ground-fault systems.
Battery systems.
Surge arresters.
Capacitors.
E.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
F.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each switchgear. Remove front and rear panels so joints
and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear
checked and that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Division 26
Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."
CLEANING
A.
3.8
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Vacuum dirt and
debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair damaged finishes.
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature
and humidity within manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.9
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION 261301
SERVICE ENTRANCE OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR
261301 - 11
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1.
1.3
Distribution transformers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of
transformer indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
1.4
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification:
Submit certification that transformers,
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a.
2.
3.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
B.
Source quality-control test reports.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
1.7
Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions
within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is
not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control
of temperature and humidity.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
B.
Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer
provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
General Electric Company.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C.
Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1.
2.
2.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
Coil Material: Copper.
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A.
Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B.
Cores: One leg per phase.
C.
Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1.
D.
Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1.
Finish Color: ANSI 49 gray.
E.
Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.
F.
Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: Two 5 percent taps below rated voltage.
G.
Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent
taps below normal full capacity.
H.
Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of
115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
I.
Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1.
2.
Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.
Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
J.
Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
K.
Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound
levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.
2.4
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
2.5
Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,
mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in
Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for
each transformer.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D.
Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5
ohms at location of transformer.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer
manufacturer.
B.
Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's
written instructions and requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems."
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
C.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
D.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
E.
Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
F.
Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of
transformer connections.
1.
2.
3.
G.
3.5
Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11
months after Substantial Completion.
Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
ADJUSTING
A.
Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B.
Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus
or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C.
Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
END OF SECTION 262200
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262300 - LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal-enclosed, low-voltage power circuit-breaker switchgear rated
1000 V and less for use in ac systems.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring
communication and metering requirements.
and
Control"
for
interfacing
DEFINITIONS
A.
ATS: Acceptance Testing Service.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchgear, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment.
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and
service space around equipment. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.
Enclosure types and details.
Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,
and weights of each assembled section.
Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run, including
phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses.
Current rating of buses.
Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly.
Nameplate legends.
Mimic-bus diagram.
Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
C.
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color charts
showing colors available for mimic bus.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances,
and required area above and around switchgear where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show
switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and
mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
Indicate field measurements.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connections
have been made, for record.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.7
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
1.8
Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for potential transformer fuses,
control power fuses, and fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers.
Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.
Touchup Paint: 3 containers of paint matching enclosure finish, each 0.5 pint.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain switchgear through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B.
Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.
1.10
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide
pathway for moving switchgear into place.
B.
Product Selection for Restricted Space:
Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchgear, including clearances between switchgear, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.11
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent
surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.
requirements are specified in Division 03.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation.
General Electric Company.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
RATINGS
A.
Nominal System Voltage: 480/277 V, 4 wire, 60 Hz.
B.
Main-Bus Continuous: As Indicated
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
C.
2.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current:
switchgear assembly.
Match rating of highest-rated circuit breaker in
FABRICATION
A.
Factory assembled and tested and complying with IEEE C37.20.1.
B.
Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.
C.
Finish: IEEE C37.20.1, manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on
phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.
D.
Section barriers between main and tie circuit-breaker compartments shall be extended to rear of
section.
E.
Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each main and tie
circuit breaker.
F.
Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers and
shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.
G.
Fabricate enclosure with removable, hinged, rear cover panels to allow access to rear interior of
switchgear.
H.
Auxiliary Compartments:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Match and align with basic switchgear assembly.
Include the
Utility metering compartment that complies with utility company requirements.
Bus transition sections.
Incoming-line pull sections.
Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments.
Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections
are not permitted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly.
Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus with
pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. Include braces
for neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders.
Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for spare
circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers.
Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material:
Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum
conductivity, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus.
Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated.
Feeder Circuit-Breaker Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped
with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.
Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure
connector for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors, minimum size 1/4 by 2
inches.
Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents.
Neutral bus equipped with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral
conductors. Neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders are braced.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
11.
12.
Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by
means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.
Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flame-retardant
tape or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation.
a.
b.
2.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils, minimum.
Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be removed
and reinstalled.
COMPONENTS
A.
Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.
1.
2.
B.
Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of
0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class suitable for
connected relays, meters, and instruments.
Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor-based unit
suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:
1.
2.
Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated
to 600 V.
Switch-selectable digital display of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
3.
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus
or minus 2 percent.
Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent; stored
values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
Mounting:
Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
C.
Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types and settings as indicated; with test blocks and plugs.
D.
Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports,
necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.
E.
Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplying 120-V control circuits through
secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:
1.
F.
Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including
primary and secondary fuses.
Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying
with the following:
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
2.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13.
B.
Ratings: As indicated for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit
breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.
C.
Operating Mechanism:
Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating
mechanism with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.
Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment.
Stored-Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, with optional manual charging.
Operation counter.
Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current
transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Functions:
Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,
independent of each other in both action and adjustment.
Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to
plus 40 deg C.
Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics.
Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on circuit
breakers, or a combination of these methods.
Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked "minimum,"
"intermediate," and "maximum."
Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip short2
time-trip function for switchable I t operation.
Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.
Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-timedelay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following:
a.
b.
c.
9.
Three-wire circuit or system.
Four-wire circuit or system.
Four-wire, double-ended substation.
Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to
indicate type of fault.
E.
Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare
auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation,
quantity as indicated. Each consists of two Type "a" and two Type "b" stages (contacts) wired
through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.
F.
Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to
position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions.
Include the following features:
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is
closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected, test, or
disconnected position.
Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected,
test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed
unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker may be
manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open.
Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:
a.
b.
Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect
devices and ground contact engaged.
Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact
disengaged.
G.
Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected
position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from
switchgear.
H.
Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure
its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.
I.
Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.
J.
Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or equivalent
design and electrical interlocks.
K.
Undervoltage Trip Devices: Adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage.
L.
Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated.
2.6
ACCESSORIES
A.
Accessory Set: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and
switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected
positions.
Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without
removal from switchgear.
Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class
relays.
B.
Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Portable, floor-supported, roller-base, elevating carriage
arranged for moving circuit breakers in and out of compartments.
C.
Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of
maintenance manual.
2.7
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols and
lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
3.
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to
produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and
connections.
Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect.
Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and
major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and connections as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Frame size of each circuit breaker.
Trip rating for each circuit breaker.
Conduit and wire size for each feeder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces where switchgear will be installed for compliance with
installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with applicable portions of NECA 400.
B.
Anchor switchgear assembly to 4-inch, channel-iron floor sill embedded in concrete base and
attach by bolting.
1.
2.
C.
3.3
Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into concrete base.
Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more
than 3 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear unless
otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. Construct concrete
bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Diagram and Instructions:
1.
Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.
a.
Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control
and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
b.
2.
3.4
System Power Riser Diagrams:
components, and major loads.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Depict power sources, feeders, distribution
Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of maintenance manual.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and
equipment. Test and adjust components and equipment.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of equipment and
components.
Report results in writing.
C.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
D.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of
the following NETA categories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Switchgear.
Circuit breakers.
Protective relays.
Instrument transformers.
Metering and instrumentation.
Ground-fault systems.
Battery systems.
Surge arresters.
Capacitors.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
E.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear. Remove front and rear panels so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Division 26
Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."
B.
Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
3.8
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Remove paint splatters
and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
PROTECTION
A.
3.9
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature
and humidity within manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION 262300
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
Transient voltage suppression devices.
Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
Instrumentation.
Control power.
Accessory components and features.
Identification.
Mimic bus.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage
suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include
dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation
and isolation.
Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.
Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus.
Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
C.
1.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified material and finish, for color
selection.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include
selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.
Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,
but no fewer than two of each size and type.
Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than one of each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and
trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space:
Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other
items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NEMA PB 2.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
G.
Comply with UL 891.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path.
B.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and install temporary
electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.
C.
Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures
to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
B.
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and
temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity
conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
b.
1.10
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.11
A.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:
1.
2.
3.
Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.
Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
Sections front and rear aligned.
C.
Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V.
D.
Main-Bus Continuous: As indicated.
E.
Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.
F.
Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish
over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
G.
Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.
H.
Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with
utility company's requirements; hinged sealed door; buses provisioned for mounting utility
company's current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by
utility company. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with
basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance
features.
I.
Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
J.
Hinged Front Panels:
compartments.
K.
Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silverplated, with tin-plated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
L.
2.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as
through buses, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.
Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuitbreaker position.
Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with
compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway
feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and
support cable at intervals in vertical run.
Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both
ends.
Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,
equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus
extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.
Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.
Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and
appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
2
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I t response.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
SWITCHBOARDS
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
Application Listing:
Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
262413 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
INSTRUMENTATION
A.
Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:
1.
2.
B.
Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, single secondary; disconnecting
type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with
connected metering and relay devices.
Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; wound type; secondary
winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with
connected metering and relay devices.
Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or fourwire systems and with the following features:
1.
Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy
tolerances as indicated:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
C.
2.
Meters: 4-inch diameter or 6 inches square, flush or semiflush, with antiparallax 250degree scales and external zero adjustment.
Voltmeters: Cover an expanded-scale range of nominal voltage plus 10 percent.
Instrument Switches: Rotary type with off position.
1.
2.
2.4
Mounting:
Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
Ammeters, Voltmeters, and Power-Factor Meters: ANSI C39.1.
1.
D.
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated
values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.
Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from
five to 60 minutes.
Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.
Voltmeter Switches: Permit reading of all phase-to-phase voltages and, where a neutral
is indicated, phase-to-neutral voltages.
Ammeter Switches: Permit reading of current in each phase and maintain currenttransformer secondaries in a closed-circuit condition at all times.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective
device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Mimic Bus: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of switchboard. Arrange
in single-line diagram format, using symbols and letter designations consistent with final mimicbus diagram.
B.
Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied.
Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections.
C.
Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with background color to represent
bus and components, complete with lettered designations.
D.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with
one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or
physically damaged.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply
with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
D.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
E.
Operating Instructions:
Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for
switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures.
Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic.
Mount on front of switchboards.
F.
Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.
G.
Install overcurrent
instrumentation.
1.
protective
transient
voltage
suppression
devices,
and
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
H.
Install spare-fuse cabinet.
I.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
devices,
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.4
Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Division 26 Section "Enclosed
Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
C.
Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each
meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
D.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
E.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
b.
c.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove
front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instruments and Equipment:
1)
4.
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties.
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Replace damaged and
F.
Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
3.7
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating:
Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to
manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into
service.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.8
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation,
and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and
communication units.
END OF SECTION 262413
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Distribution panelboards.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
1.
2.
3.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
1.6
Panelboard Schedules:
balancing.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.7
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.8
Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:
Two spares for each panelboard.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Product Selection for Restricted Space:
Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.10
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
b.
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A.
Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B.
Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.
1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X,.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged
trim cover.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
4.
5.
Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral
with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
Finishes:
a.
b.
6.
Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat.
Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
C.
Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.
D.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Material: Tin-plated aluminum.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.
Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
E.
Future Devices:
Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
F.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating:
current available at terminals.
2.2
Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1.
For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D.
Mains: Circuit breaker.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt-on circuit breakers.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C.
Mains: Circuit breaker.
D.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.4
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
2
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I t response.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
b.
PANELBOARDS
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
262416 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
c.
d.
2.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Application Listing:
Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in
on or off position.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective
device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or
have been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
D.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
E.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F.
Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space
designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor
space or below slab not on grade.
G.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing
load balancing.
H.
Comply with NECA 1.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a
computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates:
Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
D.
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
C.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
b.
c.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove
front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instruments and Equipment:
1)
E.
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
F.
3.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
C.
Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of
the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax
machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard,
is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum
requirement.
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262500 - ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Feeder-bus assemblies.
Plug-in bus assemblies.
Bus plug-in devices.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For each type of bus assembly and plug-in device.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Show fabrication and installation details for enclosed bus assemblies. Include plans,
elevations, and sections of components. Designate components and accessories,
including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, connectors, straight lengths, and fittings.
Show fittings, materials, fabrication, and installation methods for listed fire-stop barriers.
Indicate required clearances, method of field assembly, and location and size of each
field connection.
Detail connections to switchgear, switchboards, transformers, and panelboards.
Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled bus-assembly
layouts and relationships between components and adjacent structural, mechanical, and
electrical elements. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Vertical and horizontal enclosed bus-assembly runs, offsets, and transitions.
Clearances for access above and to the side of enclosed bus assemblies.
Vertical elevation of enclosed bus assemblies above the floor or bottom of structure.
Support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
B.
Location of adjacent construction elements including light fixtures, HVAC and plumbing
equipment, fire sprinklers and piping, signal and control devices, and other equipment.
C.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D.
Product Certificates: For each type of enclosed bus assembly, signed by product manufacturer.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed bus assemblies to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.7
Plug-in Units: 10 percent of amount installed for each size indicated, but no fewer than 5
unit(s).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed bus assemblies and plug-in devices through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with NEMA BU 1, "Busways."
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Deliver, store, and handle enclosed bus assemblies according to NEMA BU 1.1, "General
Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600
Volts or Less."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
Derate enclosed bus assemblies for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for
ambient temperature not exceeding 122 deg F.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed bus assemblies and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or floors or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete curbs around openings for vertical bus. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
General Electric Company; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
A.
Feeder-Bus Assemblies:
NEMA BU 1, low-impedance bus assemblies in nonventilated
housing; single-bolt joints; ratings as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Voltage: As indicated; 3 phase; 100 percent neutral capacity.
Temperature Rise: 55 deg C above 40 deg C ambient maximum for continuous rated
current.
Bus Materials: Current-carrying copper conductors, fully insulated with Class 130C
insulation except at joints; plated surface at joints.
Ground:
a.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Enclosure: Steel with manufacturer's standard finish.
Fittings and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard.
Mounting: Arranged flat, edgewise, or vertically without derating.
Plug-in Bus Assemblies: NEMA BU 1, low-impedance bus assemblies in nonventilated
housing; single-bolt joints; ratings as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Voltage: As indicated; 3 phase; 100 percent neutral capacity.
Temperature Rise: 55 deg C above 40 deg C ambient maximum for continuous rated
current.
Bus Materials: Current-carrying copper conductors, fully insulated with Class 130C
insulation except at stabs and joints; plated surface at stabs and joints.
Ground:
a.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
50 percent capacity internal bus bars of material matching bus material.
50 percent capacity internal bus bar of material matching bus material.
Enclosure: Steel, with manufacturer's standard finish, plug-in openings 24 inches o.c.,
and hinged covers over unused openings.
Fittings and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard.
Mounting: Arranged flat, edgewise, or vertically without derating.
PLUG-IN DEVICES
A.
Fusible Switches: NEMA KS 1, heavy duty; with J-type fuse clips to accommodate specified
fuses; hookstick-operated handle, lockable with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in
closed position. See Division 26 Section "Fuses" for fuses and fuse installation requirements.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Accessories: Hookstick operator, adjustable to maximum extension of 14 feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Support bus assemblies independent of supports for other elements such as equipment
enclosures at connections to panelboards and switchboards, pipes, conduits, ceilings, and
ducts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Design each fastener and support to carry 200 lb or 4 times the weight of bus assembly,
whichever is greater.
Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
Support bus assembly with not less than 3/8-inch steel rods. Install side bracing to
prevent swaying or movement of bus assembly. Modify supports after completion to
eliminate strains and stresses on bus bars and housings.
Fasten supports securely to building structure according to Division 26 Section "Hangers
and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B.
Install expansion fittings at locations where bus assemblies cross building expansion joints.
Install at other locations so distance between expansion fittings does not exceed manufacturer's
recommended distance between fittings.
C.
Construct rated fire-stop assemblies where bus assemblies penetrate fire-rated elements such
as walls, floors, and ceilings. Seal around penetrations according to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
D.
Install weatherseal fittings and flanges where bus assemblies penetrate exterior elements such
as walls or roofs. Seal around openings to make weathertight. See Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants" for materials and application.
E.
Install a concrete curb at least 4 inches high around bus-assembly floor penetrations.
F.
Coordinate bus-assembly terminations to equipment enclosures to ensure proper phasing,
connection, and closure.
G.
Tighten bus-assembly joints with torque wrench or similar tool recommended by bus-assembly
manufacturer. Tighten joints again after bus assemblies have been energized for 30 days.
H.
Install bus-assembly, plug-in units. Support connecting conduit independent of plug-in unit.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
C.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
E.
Remove and replace units that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.
F.
Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of bus
assembly including joints and plug-in units.
1.
2.
3.
G.
3.4
Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of bus assembly, one at 4 months and the other at 11
months after Substantial Completion.
Prepare a certified report identifying bus assembly checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.
END OF SECTION 262500
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262600 - POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes freestanding, prepackaged, power distribution units for transforming,
conditioning, and distributing electrical power.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
UPS: Uninterrupted power supply.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For power distribution units. Include system description, ratings, capacities, and
performance characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Detail equipment
assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1.
1.5
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of power distribution unit, signed by product manufacturer.
C.
Source quality-control test reports.
1.
D.
1.6
For each factory test of power distribution units.
Field quality-control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For power distribution units to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain a service center capable of
providing training, parts, and emergency on-site repairs in less than two hours' maximum
response time.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain power distribution unit and associated components specified in this
Section from a single manufacturer with responsibility for entire power distribution unit
installation.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions have been
permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.
B.
Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturer's ambient
temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual power distribution unit provided.
Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 03.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of power distribution units with access flooring for proper
support and seismic restraint of units.
C.
Coordinate layout and installation of power distribution units with Owner's equipment.
1.
2.
3.
1.10
A.
Meet jointly with electronic equipment representatives and Owner's representatives to
exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation
interfaces.
Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants.
Adjust arrangements and locations of power distribution units to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and space requirements of equipment.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Units shall be capable of operating continuously in the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating
capability.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Storage Temperature Range: Minus 67 to plus 185 deg F.
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 104 deg F.
Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
Altitude: Sea level to 3600 feet above sea level.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson.
Power Distribution, Inc.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
United Power Corporation.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Description: Integrated and coordinated assembly of power-line-conditioning and distribution
components packaged in a single cabinet or modular assembly of cabinets each with full-swivel
casters mounted to bottom frame. Include the following components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Unit Capacity Rating: Unit shall carry indicated rms kilovolt-ampere load continuously without
exceeding rated insulation temperature for the following input voltage and load current:
1.
2.
2.3
Input-power, circuit-breaker section.
Isolation transformer.
Output panelboard(s).
Alarm, monitoring, and control system.
Input Voltage: Within rated input-voltage tolerance band of unit.
Load Current: Minimum of 3.0 crest factor and 85 percent total harmonic distortion.
INPUT-POWER, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SECTION
A.
2.4
Description: 3-pole, shunt-tripped, thermal-magnetic-type circuit breaker, rated for indicated
interrupting capacity and 125 percent of input current of unit at 100 percent rated load.
ISOLATION TRANSFORMER SECTION
A.
Description: Dry-type, electrostatically shielded, three-phase, common-core, convection-aircooled isolation transformer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Comply with UL 1561 including requirements for nonsinusoidal load-current-handling
capability defined by designated K-factor.
Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel, one leg per phase.
Coil Material and Insulation: Copper windings with a 220 deg C insulation class.
Temperature Rise: Designed for 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient.
Output Impedance: 3.5 plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Regulation: 2 to 4 percent maximum, at full-resistive load; 5 percent maximum, at rated
nonlinear load.
Taps: 6 full-capacity compensation taps at 2.5 percent increments; 2 above and 4 below
nominal voltage.
Full-Load Efficiency: Minimum 96 percent at rated nonlinear load.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
9.
10.
11.
Magnetic-Field Strength External to Transformer Enclosure: Less than 0.1 gauss at 450
mm.
Audible Noise: Comply with NEMA ST 20.
Electrostatic Shielding: Independently shield each winding with a double-copper,
electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
12.
2.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Coil leads and terminal trips shall be arranged to minimize capacitive coupling
between input and output connections.
Shield Terminal: Separate, and marked "Shield" for grounding connection.
Capacitance: Limit capacitance between primary and secondary windings to a
maximum of 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: 120 dB minimum, 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minus 65 dB
minimum, 1.5 to 100 kHz.
Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minus 52 dB minimum, 1.5 to 10 kHz.
Neutral Rating: 1.732 times the system full-load ampere rating.
OUTPUT PANELBOARDS
A.
Description: Panelboards complying with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" except for
mounting provisions. Mount in front of power distribution units behind flush doors. Include the
following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.6
Construction: 42 pole, 240 V, 3 phase; capable of accepting branch circuit breakers
rated to 100 A.
Panelboard Rating: 225 A, with main circuit breaker.
Panelboard Phase, Neutral and Ground Buses: Copper, with neutral bus at least 1.732
times the nominal phase bus rating.
Isolated Ground Bus: Copper, adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;
insulated from supports.
Branch Circuit Breakers: Bolt on.
Cable Racks: Removable and arranged for supporting and routing cables for panelboard
entrance.
Access Panels: Arranged so additional branch-circuit wiring can be installed and
connected in the future.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT CONTROLS
A.
Include the following control features:
1.
2.
3.
Emergency, power-off switch integral with power distribution unit.
Emergency, power-off input terminals for connection to remote power-off switch.
Over-under alarm shutdown with automatic unit disconnection for the following alarm
conditions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
High temperature.
High and low input or output voltage.
Phase loss.
Ground fault.
Reverse phase rotation.
Ground-fault protection with automatic system shutdown.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
5.
6.
2.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Alarm Contacts: Electrically isolated, Form C (one normally open and one normally
closed), summary alarm; contact set shall change state if any monitored function goes
into alarm mode.
Remote Power-Off Control: Control circuit with connection to shunt trip of power
distribution unit main power circuit breaker and terminals for connection to one or more
remote power-off, push-button stations.
MONITORING, STATUS, AND ALARM ANNUNCIATION
A.
Description: Microprocessor-based monitoring, status, and alarm annunciation panel mounted
flush in front of power distribution unit to provide status display and failure-indicating interface
for the following:
1.
Power Monitoring:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Status Indication: Unit on.
Alarm Annunciation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
2.8
Input Voltage: Line to line, rms.
Output Voltage: Line to line, rms.
Output Voltage: Line to neutral, rms.
Output current.
High temperature.
High and low input voltage.
High and low output voltage.
Phase loss.
Ground fault.
Frequency.
Phase rotation.
TVSS module failure.
Audible Alarm and Silencing Switch: Alarm sounds when alarm indication occurs.
Silencing switch shall silence audible alarm but leave visual indication active until failure
or other alarm conditions are corrected.
SOUND LEVEL
A.
General: Fully assembled products comply with minimum sound-level requirements in
NEMA ST 20 for transformers of corresponding ratings when factory tested according to
IEEE C57.12.91.
B.
General: Fully assembled products have a minimum of 3 dB less than the maximum sound
levels prescribed for transformers of corresponding ratings when factory tested according to
IEEE C57.12.91.
2.9
FINISHES
A.
Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.10
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Design and routine tests shall comply with referenced standards.
B.
Factory Sound-Level Tests:
Conduct sound-level tests on equipment.
IEEE C57.12.91 and NEMA ST 20.
Comply with
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Arrange power distribution units to provide adequate access to equipment and circulation of
cooling air.
B.
Anchor or restrain floor-mounting power distribution units according to manufacturer's written
instructions and requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems."
C.
Identify equipment and install warning signs according to Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
1.
B.
3.3
Separately Derived Systems: Make grounding connections to grounding electrodes as
indicated; comply with NFPA 70.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
C.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification for circuit breakers, molded case; and for transformers,
dry type, air cooled, low voltage, small. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Perform functional tests of power distribution units throughout their operating ranges.
Test each monitoring, status, and alarm function.
D.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
E.
Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of
conductor and bus connections.
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.4
Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11
months after Substantial Completion.
Prepare a certified report identifying connections checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Verify that power distribution units are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and with
written installation requirements in Division 26 Sections.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
B.
Adjust power distribution units to provide optimum voltage to equipment served throughout
normal operating cycle of loads served. Record input and output voltages and adjustment
settings, and incorporate into test results.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain power distribution units.
Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 262600
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.3
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
Twist-locking receptacles.
Receptacles with integral surge-suppression units.
Isolated-ground receptacles.
Weather-resistant receptacles.
Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
Communications outlets.
Pendant cord-connector devices.
Cord and plug sets.
Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet
assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
C.
Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Service/Power Poles: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.
Floor Service-Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.
Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets
installed, but no fewer than two.
TVSS Receptacles: One for every 10 of each type installed, but no fewer than two of
each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers' Names:
Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.
GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted
under the following conditions:
1.
2.
Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A.
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1.
NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6
Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).
Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.4
with
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Comply
Cooper; IG5362RN.
Hubbell; IG5362.
Leviton; 5362-IG.
Pass & Seymour; IG5362.
Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the
green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from
mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent
on removable parts.
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Straight blade, feed-through type.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer
provides proper GFCI protection.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Cooper; VGF20.
Hubbell; GFR5352L.
Pass & Seymour; 2095.
Leviton; 7590.
TVSS RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-C596, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.
1.
TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of
400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to
IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
B.
Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate
device is "active" or "no longer in service."
Duplex TVSS Convenience Receptacles:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
C.
Cooper; 5362BLS.
Hubbell; HBL5362SA.
Leviton; 5380.
Pass & Seymour; 5362BLSP.
Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.
Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Cooper; IG5362BLS.
Hubbell; IG5362SA.
Leviton; 5380-IG.
Pass & Seymour; IG5362BLSP.
Description:
a.
b.
2.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.
Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding
screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting
strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on
removable parts.
TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
A.
Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.7
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Cooper; CWL520R.
Hubbell; HBL2310.
Leviton; 2310.
Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
TOGGLE SWITCHES
A.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Single Pole:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
c.
Cooper; AH1223.
Hubbell; HBL1223.
Leviton; 1223-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.
Four Way:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Cooper; AH1224.
Hubbell; HBL1224.
Leviton; 1224-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.
Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
D.
Cooper; AH1222.
Hubbell; HBL1222.
Leviton; 1222-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.
Three Way:
1)
2)
3)
4)
d.
Cooper; AH1221.
Hubbell; HBL1221.
Leviton; 1221-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.
Two Pole:
1)
2)
3)
4)
C.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V.
Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V.
Leviton; 1221-LH1.
Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.
Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."
Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Cooper; AH1221L.
Hubbell; HBL1221L.
Leviton; 1221-2L.
Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.8
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A.
Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with
audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B.
Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with
UL 1472.
C.
Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off
switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.
1.
D.
2.9
600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated
when "off."
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches:
Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent
dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
WALL PLATES
A.
Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.10
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A.
Type: Modular, flush-type or above-floor, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used and
as approved by the Architect.
B.
Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C.
Service Plate: Round, solid brass with satin finish.
D.
Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP
cable complying with requirements in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
2.11
POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of
the following:
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand.
Square D/Schneider Electric.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold/Legrand.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.12
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled,
through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service-outlet
assembly.
Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.
Service-Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two simplex receptacles and space for two RJ45 jacks complying with requirements in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal
Cabling."
Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.
Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.
Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating
of floor.
Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors
and a minimum of four, four-pair cables that comply with requirements in Division 27
Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of
the following:
1.
2.
C.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
Wiremold/Legrand.
Description:
1.
2.
Two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory-wired multioutlet harness.
Components shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a complete,
matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
D.
Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.
E.
Multioutlet Harness:
1.
2.
3.
Receptacles: 15-A, 125-V, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles complying with
NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
Receptacle Spacing: 12 inches.
Wiring: No. 12 AWG solid, Type THHN copper, two circuit, connecting alternating
receptacles.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.13
A.
SERVICE POLES
Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.14
A.
Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication
from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor.
Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch- square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor
to at least 6 inches above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice
and data communication cabling.
Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to
ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment.
Finishes: Satin-anodized aluminum.
Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a
minimum of four, four-pair, Category 3 or Category 5 voice and data communication
cables.
Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, straight-blade receptacles complying with
requirements in this Section.
Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Four RJ-45 jacks complying with requirements
in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
FINISHES
Device Color:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray, as selected by Architect,
unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
TVSS Devices: Blue.
Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.
Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against
outside of boxes.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
C.
Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
Device Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
E.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
2.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the left.
Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral
blade at the top.
F.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G.
Dimmers:
1.
2.
3.
Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
I.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
3.3
Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is
not required.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or
engraved machine printing with red-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or
tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1.
2.
3.
B.
In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout
or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches and
enclosed controllers.
Spare-fuse cabinets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,
dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include
the following for each fuse type indicated:
1.
Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to
accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.4
For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,
local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment
calculations are based.
Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on
translucent log-log graph paper.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
FUSES
Ambient temperature adjustment information.
Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
262813 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
4.
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit on
translucent log-log graph paper.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
two of each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source
from single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more
than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size
and with system short-circuit current levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
FUSES
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
Littelfuse, Inc.
262813 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
CARTRIDGE FUSES
A.
2.3
Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with
circuit voltages.
PLUG FUSES
A.
2.4
Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.
SPARE-FUSE CABINET
A.
Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and keycoded cam lock and pull.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity
minimum.
Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- high letters on exterior of door.
Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine fuses before installation.
damaged.
B.
Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
C.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes
and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
D.
Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to
fuse ratings.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
FUSE APPLICATIONS
A.
Cartridge Fuses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
FUSES
Feeders: Class J, time delay.
Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay or Class J, time delay.
Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.
262813 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
removing fuse.
B.
Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are
irremovable once installed.
C.
Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).
3.4
Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door
of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.
END OF SECTION 262813
FUSES
262813 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Fusible switches.
Nonfusible switches.
Receptacle switches.
Shunt trip switches.
Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
Molded-case switches.
Enclosures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
NC: Normally closed.
B.
NO: Normally open.
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Current and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Include plans, elevations,
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.6
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
Manufacturer's field service report.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.7
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.8
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
three of each size and type.
Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from
single manufacturer.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
B.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
1.10
A.
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required
clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with capability
to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper neutral conductors.
Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
C.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper neutral conductors.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting
capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D.
Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers:
field-adjustable trip setting.
E.
Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following
field-adjustable settings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
2
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I t response.
Features and Accessories:
1.
2.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
2.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
E.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
C.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and
circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial
Completion.
Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties.
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Replace damaged and
E.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches
and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study".
END OF SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Section:
1.
1.3
Full-voltage manual.
Full-voltage magnetic.
Reduced-voltage magnetic.
Reduced-voltage solid state.
Multispeed.
Division 26 Section "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" for general-purpose, ac,
adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variable torque loads
in ranges up to 200 hp.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CPT: Control power transformer.
B.
MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
C.
MCP: Motor circuit protector.
D.
N.C.: Normally closed.
E.
N.O.: Normally open.
F.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
G.
SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections,
details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
Show tabulations of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Each installed unit's type and details.
Factory-installed devices.
Nameplate legends.
Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs
in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in
combination controllers.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
D.
Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and
arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.
E.
Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have
been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload
protection suit actual motors to be protected.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip
settings.
Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reducedvoltage solid-state controllers.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.8
Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,
but no fewer than two of each size and type.
Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller
installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent
condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive
substances, and physical damage.
B.
If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather,
dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable
materials from inside controllers.
1.10
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
1.11
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including
conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances
and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
C.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
A.
General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers:
purpose, Class A.
B.
Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to
show whether unit is off or on.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Configuration: Nonreversing.
Flush mounting.
Red pilot light.
Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button
action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Configuration: Nonreversing.
Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping
characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;
external reset push button; bimetallic type.
Surface mounting.
Red pilot light.
Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
e.
2.
3.
5.
d.
e.
E.
CPT Spare Capacity: 200 VA.
Bimetallic Overload Relays:
a.
b.
c.
7.
8.
Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating,
manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.
Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to
allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.
Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary
fuses of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot,
indicating, and control devices.
a.
6.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Configuration: Nonreversing.
Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.
a.
4.
Inverse-time-current characteristic.
Class 10 tripping characteristic.
Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected
motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
Ambient compensated.
Automatic resetting.
2 sets of N.C. and N.O., isolated overload alarm contact.
External overload reset push button.
Combination Magnetic Controller:
OCPD, and disconnecting means.
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Fusible Disconnecting Means:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller,
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate Class J or Class R fuses.
Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:
a.
b.
c.
NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch.
Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
5.
MCP Disconnecting Means:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with
available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted,
field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.
2 sets of N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.
Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating
to 100 kA.
MCCB Disconnecting Means:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with
available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current
element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short
circuits.
Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes
250 A and larger.
Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle.
2 sets of N.C. and N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosed Controllers:
location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed
Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
Kitchen Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
Type 12.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in
controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy duty, oiltight type.
a.
b.
c.
Push Buttons: Recessed.
Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test.
Selector Switches: Rotary type.
B.
N.C. and N.O. auxiliary contact(s).
C.
Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state
sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable
undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
D.
Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.
E.
Terminals for connecting power factor correction capacitors to the line and load side of overload
relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine enclosed controllers before installation.
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
Reject enclosed controllers that are wet,
INSTALLATION
A.
Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height
unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structuralsteel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying
with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
C.
Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.
D.
Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26
Section "Fuses."
E.
Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load
amperes after motors have been installed.
F.
Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven
equipment.
G.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.
Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in
Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
B.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C.
Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.
1.
2.
3.5
Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.
Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, hightemperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
C.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test
and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting
motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor
nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction
Manager before starting the motor(s).
Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed
controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
b.
c.
9.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial
Completion.
Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties.
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Replace damaged and
E.
Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed
controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay
pickup and trip ranges.
B.
Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to
the load side of the overload relays.
C.
Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable
instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere
ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts.
If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without
tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA
Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a
motor, notify Construction Manager before increasing settings.
D.
Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop
sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
E.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
3.7
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
B.
Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to
Substantial Completion.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.8
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers, and to use and reprogram microprocessorbased, reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
END OF SECTION 262913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less,
for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Division 26 Section "Motor-Control Centers" for VFCs installed in motor-control centers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
BAS: Building automation system.
B.
CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).
C.
CPT: Control power transformer.
D.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E.
IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor.
F.
LAN: Local area network.
G.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
H.
MCP: Motor-circuit protector.
I.
NC: Normally closed.
J.
NO: Normally open.
K.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
L.
PCC: Point of common coupling.
M.
PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.
N.
PWM: Pulse-width modulated.
O.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
P.
TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion.
Q.
THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.
R.
VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. Include features, performance,
electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
C.
Product Data for Credit EA 5:
consumption.
Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections;
and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment.
1.
Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
1.5
For continuous metering equipment for energy
Include the
Each installed unit's type and details.
Factory-installed devices.
Enclosure types and details.
Nameplate legends.
Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each VFC and installed
devices.
Specified modifications.
Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required
working clearances, and required area above and around VFCs. Show VFC layout and
relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements.
Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field
measurements.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
C.
Product Certificates: For each VFC, from manufacturer.
D.
Harmonic Analysis Study and Report: Comply with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing
Specification; identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic contributions
on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze possible operating
scenarios, including recommendations for VFC input filtering to limit TDD and THD(V) at each
VFC to specified levels.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
E.
Source quality-control reports.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
G.
Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and
arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full-load
currents.
H.
Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have
been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload
protection suit actual motors to be protected.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker and MCP trip settings.
Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming
microprocessor control modules.
Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status
and alarm points.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.8
Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,
but no fewer than two of each size and type.
Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish two spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller
installed.
Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor
installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test VFC according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.9
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.10
A.
If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside controllers and connect factory-installed space heaters to
temporary electrical service.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load
without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.11
A.
Ambient Temperature: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F.
Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140
deg F
Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).
Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs,
including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
COORDINATION
Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be
compatible with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
1.12
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
3.
4.
5.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
General Requirements for VFCs:
UL 508C.
C.
VFC Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, dc bus, and IGBT, PWM
inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent
and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide
self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction
motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and
Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors as defined by
NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors
Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used
with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both."
Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1,
Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors."
Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection
used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.
E.
Output Rating: Three-phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout
voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.
F.
Unit Operating Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFC input voltage rating.
Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent.
Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating.
Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any load or speed
condition.
Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 22 kA.
Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F.
Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding
140 deg F
Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).
Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC 60068-2-6.
Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8
times the base load current for three seconds.
Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz.
Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent.
Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz.
Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.
G.
Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits.
H.
Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1
speed range.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
I.
Signal: Electrical.
Signal: Pneumatic.
Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.
Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.
Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.
Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase
protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal
line voltage.
Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to
a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.
Under- and overvoltage trips.
Inverter overcurrent trips.
VFC and Motor Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal
protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for
providing VFC overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via
the keypad; NRTL approved.
Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands.
Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
Loss-of-phase protection.
Reverse-phase protection.
Short-circuit protection.
Motor overtemperature fault.
K.
Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an
interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time
between restart attempts.
L.
Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption
until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and
engaged.
M.
Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either
direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive,
motor, or load.
N.
Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the
minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.
O.
Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on
output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow
speeds.
P.
Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker
with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.
1.
2.
Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFC input current rating.
Auxiliary Contacts: NO/NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
4.
2.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker handle.
2 sets of NC and NO alarm contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.
CONTROLS AND INDICATION
A.
Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Power on.
Run.
Overvoltage.
Line fault.
Overcurrent.
External fault.
Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and
plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying,
operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.
1.
2.
Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND,
OFF, and AUTO modes.
Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and
password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view,
operate, and service.
a.
C.
Historical Logging Information and Displays:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Real-time clock with current time and date.
Running log of total power versus time.
Total run time.
Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.
Indicating Devices: Digital display and additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in
VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
E.
Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at
VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote
source.
Output frequency (Hz).
Motor speed (rpm).
Motor status (running, stop, fault).
Motor current (amperes).
Motor torque (percent).
Fault or alarming status (code).
PID feedback signal (percent).
DC-link voltage (V dc).
Set point frequency (Hz).
Motor output voltage (V ac).
Control Signal Interfaces:
1.
Electric Input Signal Interface:
a.
A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
b.
2.
Number of Loops: One.
BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control,
and display VFC status and alarms and energy usage. Allows VFC to be used with an external
system within a multidrop LAN configuration; settings retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory.
1.
2.
2.3
Motor running.
Set point speed reached.
Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).
PID high- or low-speed limits reached.
PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response
to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or
temperature regulation.
1.
G.
Output frequency (Hz).
Output current (load).
DC-link voltage (V dc).
Motor torque (percent).
Motor speed (rpm).
Set point frequency (Hz).
Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs
(120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
F.
0- to 10-V dc.
4- to 20-mA dc.
Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
Output Signal Interface: A minimum of two programmable analog output signal(s) 0- to
10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc, which can be configured for any of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.
Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input
signals from the BAS or other control systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Network Communications Ports: Ethernet and RS-422/485.
Embedded BAS Protocols for Network Communications:
protocols accessible via the communications ports.
ASHRAE 135 BACnet,
LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING
A.
Input Line Conditioning: Based on the harmonic analysis study and report, provide input
filtering, as required, to limit TDD and THD(V) at the defined PCC per IEEE 519
B.
EMI/RFI Filtering: CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
OPTIONAL FEATURES
A.
Multiple-Motor Capability: VFC suitable for variable-speed service to multiple motors. Overload
protection shuts down VFC and motors served by it and generates fault indications, when
overload protection activates.
1.
2.
Configure to allow two or more motors to operate simultaneously at the same speed;
separate overload relay for each controlled motor.
Configure to allow two motors to operate separately; operator selectable via local or
remote switch or contact closures; single overload relay for both motors; separate output
magnetic contactors for each motor.
B.
Damper control circuit with end of travel feedback capability.
C.
Sleep Function: Senses a minimal deviation of a feedback signal and stops the motor. On an
increase in speed-command signal deviation, VFC resumes normal operation.
D.
Motor Preheat Function: Preheats motor when idle to prevent moisture accumulation in the
motor.
E.
Firefighter's Override (Smoke Purge) Input: On a remote contact closure from the firefighter's
control station or smoke-control fan controller, this password-protected input:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Overrides all other local and external inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all
keypad commands).
Forces VFC to operate motor, without any other run or speed command, at a fieldadjustable, preset speed.
Causes display of Override Mode on the VFC display.
Reset VFC to normal operation on removal of override signal automatically.
F.
Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.
G.
Remote digital operator kit.
H.
Communication Port:
connecting a printer.
2.5
RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of
ENCLOSURES
A.
VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
Kitchen Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
Type 12.
Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFC as
"Plenum Rated."
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
ACCESSORIES
A.
General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in
VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, type.
a.
b.
c.
Push Buttons: Recessed.
Pilot Lights: LED types.
Selector Switches: Rotary type.
B.
Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.
C.
Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state
sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable
undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.
1.
D.
Supplemental Digital Meters:
1.
2.
3.
E.
2.7
Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL)
rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with
IEEE C57.13.
Elapsed-time meter.
Kilowatt meter.
Kilowatt-hour meter.
Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For NEMA 250, Type 1; UL 508 component recognized:
Supply fan, with stainless steel intake and exhaust grills and filters; 120-V ac; obtained from
integral CPT.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.
1.
2.
Test each VFC while connected to its specified motor.
Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features
specified.
B.
VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine VFC before installation.
damaged.
Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
C.
Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before
VFC installation.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
HARMONIC ANALYSIS STUDY
A.
Perform a harmonic analysis study to identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated
harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze
possible operating scenarios, including recommendations for VFC input filtering to limit TDD
and THD(V) at each VFC to specified levels.
B.
Prepare a harmonic analysis study and report complying with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping,
equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required
clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on walls with tops at uniform height and with
disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor unless otherwise
indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted
to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26
Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C.
Roof-Mounting Controllers: Install VFC on roofs with tops at uniform height and with disconnect
operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished roof surface unless otherwise
indicated, and by bolting units to curbs or mounting on freestanding, lightweight, structural-steel
channels bolted to curbs. Seal roof penetrations after raceways are installed.
1.
2.
Curbs and roof penetrations are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
Structural-steel channels are specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems."
D.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
E.
Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.
F.
Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26
Section "Fuses."
G.
Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load
amperes after motors have been installed.
H.
Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven
equipment.
I.
Comply with NECA 1.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 11
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.5
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
Label each VFC with engraved nameplate.
Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control
sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover
instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply
with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
B.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C.
Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable.
1.
Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for
safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature
cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
C.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and
adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply,
feeder, and control circuits.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated
voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager before starting
the motor(s).
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 12
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
5.
6.
7.
8.
Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a.
b.
c.
9.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFC. Remove front
panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each VFC 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties.
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Replace damaged and
E.
VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and
describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken,
and observations made after remedial action.
3.7
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
3.8
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
ADJUSTING
A.
Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event
recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to
Substantial Completion.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay
pickup and trip ranges.
C.
Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable,
instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes
and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If
tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping.
Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient
motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify
Construction Manager before increasing settings.
D.
Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.
E.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 13
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
F.
3.9
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Set field-adjustable pressure switches.
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
B.
Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial
Completion.
3.10
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.
END OF SECTION 262923
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 14
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the
following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Diesel engine.
Unit-mounted cooling system.
Unit-mounted control and monitoring.
Performance requirements for sensitive loads.
Outdoor enclosure.
Division 26 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and
relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over
the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the
parameter.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the
following:
1.
2.
B.
Thermal damage curve for generator.
Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
2.
Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other
components specified.
Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate
requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing
vibration isolation bases.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
4.
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported
equipment. Include base weights.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that base mounted
tank, engine-generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a.
b.
2.
3.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
B.
Qualification Data: For installer.
C.
Source quality-control test reports.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.
Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not
identical, to those tested on prototype unit.
Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement
to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.
Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of
compliance with specified requirements.
Report of sound generation.
Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations.
Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready
access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
1.8
Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each.
Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each.
Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
1.
2.
Maintenance Proximity: Not more than one hour normal travel time from Installer's place
of business to Project site.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic
restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and
engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those
indicated for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 50 miles of Project site,
a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one
source from a single manufacturer.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
F.
Comply with ASME B15.1.
G.
Comply with NFPA 37.
H.
Comply with NFPA 70.
I.
Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
J.
Comply with UL 2200.
K.
Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.
L.
Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.9
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
B.
Environmental Conditions:
Engine-generator system shall withstand the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
performance capability:
1.
2.
3.
1.10
Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption
of electrical service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's
written permission.
Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C.
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
Altitude: Sea level to 3300 feet.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
B.
Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations for
remote radiators. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.11
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
1.12
A.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include
quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include
routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for
proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original equipment.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Caterpillar; Engine Div.
Kohler Co.; Generator Division.
Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.
ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A.
Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.
B.
Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete
foundation; and have lifting attachments.
1.
C.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to
indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of
gravity.
Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate
as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.
Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.
Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and
address, and model and serial number of component.
Generator-Set Performance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no
load to full load.
Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent stepload increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within three seconds.
Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no
load to full load.
Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within
the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state
operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.
Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent stepload increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within five seconds.
Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral
shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence
factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output
terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not
less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator
system components.
Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
E.
Generator-Set Performance for Sensitive Loads:
1.
Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible
to meet specified performance.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract
Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size
installed.
Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no
load to full load.
Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent stepload increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within 0.5 second.
Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated
frequency from no load to full load.
Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within
the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state
operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.
Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load
increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within three seconds.
Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not
exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined
according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output
terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not
less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding
insulation or other generator system components.
Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by
nonlinear load.
a.
2.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.
Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
ENGINE
A.
Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.
B.
Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
C.
Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.
D.
Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:
1.
2.
3.
Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller
while passing full flow.
Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature.
Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable
container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or
appliances.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
E.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Engine Fuel System:
1.
2.
Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under
starting and load conditions.
Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess
fuel to source.
F.
Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system.
Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.
G.
Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
H.
Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generatorset mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water,
with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.
Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start
to 110 percent load condition.
Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum
closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and
petcock.
Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow
automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by
engine manufacturer.
Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer
covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.
a.
b.
I.
Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and
noncollapsible under vacuum.
End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and
equipment connections.
Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected
with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure
requirements.
1.
2.
Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.
Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is
complete shall be 85 dBA or less.
J.
Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element
and "blocked filter" indicator.
K.
Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine
flywheel without binding.
Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1.
Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project
Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without
recharging.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
5.
6.
7.
8.
Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated.
Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.
Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal
insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above
10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1
"Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries
in place.
Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage
regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit
shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after
battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode
and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of
input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging
rates.
Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts
providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense
high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either
condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication
at system control and monitoring panel.
Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.
FUEL OIL STORAGE
A.
Comply with NFPA 30.
B.
Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank.
Features include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Tank level indicator.
Capacity: As indicated.
Vandal-resistant fill cap.
Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
CONTROL AND MONITORING
A.
Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control
and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more
separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When
mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of
same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system
or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate
alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls,
engine gages, instrument transformers, generator disconnect switch or circuit breaker, and
other indicated components shall be grouped in a combination control and power panel.
Control and monitoring section of panel shall be isolated from power sections by steel barriers.
Panel features shall include the following:
1.
2.
C.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Wall-Mounting Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit complying with
NEMA ICS 6. Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and
temperature rise shall comply with UL 891.
Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class.
Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system,
and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
AC voltmeter.
AC ammeter.
AC frequency meter.
DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
Engine-coolant temperature gage.
Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
Running-time meter.
Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).
Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.
Fuel tank derangement alarm.
Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.
Generator overload.
D.
Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and
include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items
on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for
each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data-link transmission of
indications to remote data terminals. Data system connections to terminals are covered in
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
F.
Common Remote Audible Alarm: Signal the occurrence of any events listed below without
differentiating between event types. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of
initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
G.
Engine high-temperature shutdown.
Lube-oil, low-pressure shutdown.
Overspeed shutdown.
Remote emergency-stop shutdown.
Engine high-temperature prealarm.
Lube-oil, low-pressure prealarm.
Fuel tank, low-fuel level.
Low coolant level.
Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled.
Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.6
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A.
Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with
UL 489.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.7
Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous.
Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve.
Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other
protective devices.
Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.
Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground-fault.
Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generator-set alarm indications.
GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A.
Comply with NEMA MG 1.
B.
Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated
integrally with generator rotor.
C.
Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D.
Stator-Winding Leads:
voltages if required.
E.
Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,
overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated
capacity.
F.
Enclosure: Dripproof.
G.
Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.
H.
Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.
1.
Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
I.
Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew
point.
J.
Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.
K.
Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.
2.8
OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A.
Description: Prefabricated or preengineered walk-in enclosure with the following features:
1.
2.
Construction: Galvanized-steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed building
erected on concrete foundation.
Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.
2.9
Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable
louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.
Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed
to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.
Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to
illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external electrical connection.
1.
2.
D.
Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation.
Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when
engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.
Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.
Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation
while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.
Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in
coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating
limits required by engine-generator-set components.
Muffler Location: Within enclosure.
Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components
within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient
temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.
1.
C.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source is available.
DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both
unavailable.
Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.
MOTORS
A.
General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1.
2.
2.10
A.
VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in
single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates of
sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 26 Sections.
Material: Bridge-bearing neoprene, complying with AASHTO M 251.
Durometer Rating: 40.
Number of Layers: Two.
Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 11
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind
loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,
elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
FINISHES
Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant
pretreatment and compatible primer.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of
identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
1.
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.
Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other
system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at
rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to
those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.
Full load run.
Maximum power.
Voltage regulation.
Transient and steady-state governing.
Single-step load pickup.
Safety shutdown.
Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by
Owner's representative.
Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator
performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of
connections before packaged engine-generator installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 12
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.2
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment
instructions and with NFPA 110.
B.
Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or
accessories, for periodic maintenance.
C.
Install packaged engine generator with elastomeric isolator pads having a minimum deflection
of 1 inch on 4-inch- high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete
bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems."
D.
Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install
thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel
piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic
Piping."
1.
E.
3.3
Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a
shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with
welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are
specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections.
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B.
Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine
generator to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set with flexible connectors.
D.
Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
E.
Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.
1.
2.
3.
Drawings indicate
Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuel systems
are specified in Division 23 Section "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."
Natural-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution are specified in Division 23
Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."
LP-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas piping are specified in Division 23 Section
"Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping."
F.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
G.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 13
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.5
Identify system components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment" and Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
C.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and
mechanical inspection (except those indicated to be optional) for "AC Generators and for
Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.
Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for
full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity under both conditions.
Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a
capacity load test for the battery.
Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.
Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and floatcharging conditions.
System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity
of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check
for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch
wg. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure
at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.
Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria.
Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure
voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and
decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.
Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent
and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified
limits.
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 14
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
10.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set
installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four
locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.
E.
Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
F.
Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of
NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records
available for examination on request.
G.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
H.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
I.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
equipment.
J.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
K.
Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
L.
Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a
label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
M.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus
connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months
after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and
connections checked and that describes scanning results.
Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 263213
ENGINE GENERATORS
263213 - 15
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 263353 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Three-phase, on-line, double-conversion, static-type, UPS units with the following
features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
1.3
Surge suppression.
Input harmonics reduction.
Rectifier-charger.
Inverter.
Static bypass transfer switch.
Battery and battery disconnect device.
Internal maintenance bypass/isolation switch.
Output isolation transformer.
Remote UPS monitoring provisions.
Battery monitoring.
Remote monitoring.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
LCD: Liquid-crystal display.
C.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
D.
PC: Personal computer.
E.
THD: Total harmonic distortion.
F.
UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on features, components,
ratings, and performance.
B.
Shop Drawings: For UPS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, components, and
location and identification of each field connection. Show access, workspace, and
clearance requirements; details of control panels; and battery arrangement.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified power quality specialist.
B.
Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.
C.
Factory Test Reports: Comply with specified requirements.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
E.
Performance Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance
requirements, and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree.
F.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For UPS units to include in emergency, operation, and
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.8
Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each.
Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set(s).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor:
testing.
Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
UL Compliance: Listed and labeled under UL 1778 by an NRTL.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
Special Battery Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair
or replace UPS system storage batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
B.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Warranted Cycle Life for Premium Valve-Regulated, Lead-calcium Batteries: Equal to or
greater than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures
corresponding to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F
(25 deg C):
Discharge Rate
Discharge Duration
8 hours
30 minutes
15 minutes
8 hours
30 minutes
1.5 minutes
Discharge End
Voltage
1.67
1.67
1.67
Cycle Life
40 cycles
125 cycles
750 cycles
Special UPS Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or
replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within special warranty period.
1.
Special Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Automatic operation includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Normal Conditions: Load is supplied with power flowing from the normal power input
terminals, through the rectifier-charger and inverter, with the battery connected in parallel
with the rectifier-charger output.
Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal supply deviates from specified and adjustable
voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, the battery supplies energy to maintain
constant, regulated inverter power output to the load without switching or disturbance.
If normal power fails, energy supplied by the battery through the inverter continues
supply-regulated power to the load without switching or disturbance.
When power is restored at the normal supply terminals of the system, controls
automatically synchronize the inverter with the external source before transferring the
load. The rectifier-charger then supplies power to the load through the inverter and
simultaneously recharges the battery.
If the battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, the rectifier-charger
charges the battery. On reaching full charge, the rectifier-charger automatically shifts to
float-charge mode.
If any element of the UPS system fails and power is available at the normal supply
terminals of the system, the static bypass transfer switch switches the load to the normal
ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.
If a fault occurs in the system supplied by the UPS, and current flows in excess of the
overload rating of the UPS system, the static bypass transfer switch operates to bypass
the fault current to the normal ac supply circuit for fault clearing.
When the fault has cleared, the static bypass transfer switch returns the load to the UPS
system.
If the battery is disconnected, the UPS continues to supply power to the load with no
degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of the output bus.
Manual operation includes the following:
1.
Turning the inverter off causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load
directly to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
C.
2.
3.
Full Isolation: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. Normal UPS ac input circuit, static
bypass transfer switch, and UPS load terminals are completely disconnected from
external circuits.
Maintenance Bypass: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. UPS ac supply terminals
are energized to permit operational checking, but system load terminals are isolated from
the load.
Normal: Normal UPS ac supply terminals are energized and the load is supplied through
either the static bypass transfer switch and the UPS rectifier-charger and inverter, or the
battery and the inverter.
Environmental Conditions: The UPS shall be capable of operating continuously in the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating
capability, except battery performance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Turning the inverter on causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load to the
inverter.
Maintenance Bypass/Isolation Switch Operation: Switch is interlocked so it cannot be operated
unless the static bypass transfer switch is in the bypass mode. Device provides manual
selection among the three conditions in subparagraphs below without interrupting supply to the
load during switching:
1.
D.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Ambient Temperature for Electronic Components: 32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C).
Ambient Temperature for Battery: 41 to 95 deg F (5 to 35 deg C).
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet (1220 m).
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
The UPS shall perform as specified in this article while supplying rated full-load current,
composed of any combination of linear and nonlinear load, up to 100 percent nonlinear load
with a load crest factor of 3.0, under the following conditions or combinations of the following
conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inverter is switched to battery source.
Steady-state ac input voltage deviates up to plus or minus 10 percent from nominal
voltage.
Steady-state input frequency deviates up to plus or minus 5 percent from nominal
frequency.
THD of input voltage is 15 percent or more with a minimum crest factor of 3.0, and the
largest single harmonic component is a minimum of 5 percent of the fundamental value.
Load is 50 percent unbalanced continuously.
B.
Minimum Duration of Supply: If battery is sole energy source supplying rated full UPS load
current at 80 percent power factor, duration of supply is 15 minutes.
C.
Input Voltage Tolerance: System steady-state and transient output performance remains within
specified tolerances when steady-state ac input voltage varies plus 10, minus 20 percent from
nominal voltage.
D.
Overall UPS Efficiency: Equal to or greater than 90 percent at 100 percent load, percent at 75
percent load, and percent at 50 percent load.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
E.
Maximum Acoustical Noise: 78, "A" weighting, emanating from any UPS component under any
condition of normal operation, measured from nearest surface of component enclosure.
F.
Maximum Energizing Inrush Current: Six times the full-load current.
G.
Maximum AC Output-Voltage Regulation for Loads up to 50 Percent Unbalanced: Plus or
minus 2 percent over the full range of battery voltage.
H.
Output Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 0.5 percent over the full range of input voltage, load,
and battery voltage.
I.
Limitation of harmonic distortion of input current to the UPS shall be as follows:
1.
Description: Either a tuned harmonic filter or an arrangement of rectifier-charger circuits
shall limit THD to 5 percent, maximum, at rated full UPS load current, for power sources
with X/R ratio between 2 and 30.
J.
Maximum Harmonic Content of Output-Voltage Waveform: 5 percent rms total and 3 percent
rms for any single harmonic, for 100 percent rated nonlinear load current with a load crest factor
of 3.0.
K.
Minimum Overload Capacity of UPS at Rated Voltage: 125 percent of rated full load for 10
minutes, and 150 percent for 30 seconds in all operating modes.
L.
Maximum Output-Voltage Transient Excursions from Rated Value:
For the following
instantaneous load changes, stated as percentages of rated full UPS load, voltage shall remain
within stated percentages of rated value and recover to, and remain within, plus or minus 2
percent of that value within 100 ms:
1.
2.
3.
4.
M.
2.3
50 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent.
100 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent.
Loss of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Restoration of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.
EMI Emissions: Comply with FCC Rules and Regulations and with 47 CFR 15 for Class A
equipment.
UPS SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Corporation; Powerware Division.
Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson.
MGE UPS SYSTEMS.
B.
Electronic Equipment: Solid-state devices using hermetically sealed, semiconductor elements.
Devices include rectifier-charger, inverter, static bypass transfer switch, and system controls.
C.
Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Control Assemblies: Mount on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
E.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Surge Suppression: Protect internal UPS components from surges that enter at each ac power
input connection including main disconnect switch, static bypass transfer switch, and
maintenance bypass/isolation switch. Protect rectifier-charger, inverter, controls, and output
components.
1.
2.
Use factory-installed surge suppressors tested according to IEEE C62.41.1 and
IEEE C62.41.2, Category C.
Additional Surge Protection: Protect internal UPS components from low-frequency, highenergy voltage surges described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Design the
circuits connecting with external power sources and select circuit elements, conductors,
conventional surge suppressors, and rectifier components and controls so input
assemblies will have adequate mechanical strength and thermal and current-carrying
capacity to withstand stresses imposed by 40-Hz, 180 percent voltage surges described
in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2.
F.
Maintainability Features: Mount rectifier-charger and inverter sections and the static bypass
transfer switch on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.
G.
UPS Cabinet Ventilation: Redundant fans or blowers draw in ambient air near the bottom of
cabinet and discharge it near the top rear.
H.
Output Circuit Neutral Bus, Conductor, and Terminal Ampacity: Rated phase current times a
multiple of 1.73, minimum.
2.4
RECTIFIER-CHARGER
A.
Capacity: Adequate to supply the inverter during rated full output load conditions and
simultaneously recharge the battery from fully discharged condition to 95 percent of full charge
within 10 times the rated discharge time for duration of supply under battery power at full load.
B.
Output Ripple: Limited by output filtration to less than 0.5 percent of rated current, peak to
peak.
C.
Control Circuits: Immune to frequency variations within rated frequency ranges of normal and
emergency power sources.
1.
D.
2.5
Response Time:
power source.
Field adjustable for maximum compatibility with local generator-set
Battery Float-Charging Conditions: Comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for
battery terminal voltage and charging current required for maximum battery life.
INVERTER
A.
2.6
Description: Pulse-width modulated, with sinusoidal output. Include a bypass phase
synchronization window adjustment to optimize compatibility with local engine-generator-set
power source.
STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH
A.
Description: Solid-state switching device providing uninterrupted transfer. A contactor or
electrically operated circuit breaker automatically provides electrical isolation for the switch.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
2.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Switch Rating: Continuous duty at the rated full UPS load current, minimum.
BATTERY
A.
Description: Valve-regulated, premium, heavy-duty, recombinant, lead-calcium units; factory
assembled in an isolated compartment or in a separate matching cabinet, complete with battery
disconnect switch.
1.
B.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
Arrange for drawout removal of battery assembly from cabinet for testing and inspecting.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
C&D Technologies, Inc.; Standby Power Division.
Eaton Corporation; Powerware Division.
EnerSys.
Panasonic Corporation of North America; Panasonic Industrial Company.
CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS
A.
Description: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on a common control panel
on front of UPS enclosure.
B.
Minimum displays, indicating devices, and controls include those in lists below. Provide
sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and wiring required to support listed items. Alarms
include audible signals and visual displays.
C.
Indications: Plain-language messages on a digital LCD or LED.
1.
Quantitative indications shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Basic status condition indications shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Input voltage, each phase, line to line.
Input current, each phase, line to line.
Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line.
Bypass input frequency.
System output voltage, each phase, line to line.
System output current, each phase.
System output frequency.
DC bus voltage.
Battery current and direction (charge/discharge).
Elapsed time discharging battery.
Normal operation.
Load-on bypass.
Load-on battery.
Inverter off.
Alarm condition.
Alarm indications shall include the following:
a.
Bypass ac input overvoltage or undervoltage.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
bb.
cc.
dd.
ee.
ff.
4.
Inverter on-off.
UPS start.
Battery test.
Alarm silence/reset.
Output-voltage adjustment.
Dry-form "C" contacts shall be available for remote indication of the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Bypass ac input overfrequency or underfrequency.
Bypass ac input and inverter out of synchronization.
Bypass ac input wrong-phase rotation.
Bypass ac input single-phase condition.
Bypass ac input filter fuse blown.
Internal frequency standard in use.
Battery system alarm.
Control power failure.
Fan failure.
UPS overload.
Battery-charging control faulty.
Input overvoltage or undervoltage.
Input transformer overtemperature.
Input circuit breaker tripped.
Input wrong-phase rotation.
Input single-phase condition.
Approaching end of battery operation.
Battery undervoltage shutdown.
Maximum battery voltage.
Inverter fuse blown.
Inverter transformer overtemperature.
Inverter overtemperature.
Static bypass transfer switch overtemperature.
Inverter power supply fault.
Inverter transistors out of saturation.
Identification of faulty inverter section/leg.
Inverter output overvoltage or undervoltage.
UPS overload shutdown.
Inverter current sensor fault.
Inverter output contactor open.
Inverter current limit.
Controls shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
UPS on battery.
UPS on-line.
UPS load-on bypass.
UPS in alarm condition.
UPS off (maintenance bypass closed).
Emergency Power Off Switch: Capable of local operation and operation by means of activation
by external dry contacts.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.9
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH
A.
Description: Manually operated switch or arrangement of switching devices with mechanically
actuated contact mechanism arranged to route the flow of power to the load around the rectifiercharger, inverter, and static bypass transfer switch.
1.
2.
Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting power to
the load when switching to bypass mode.
Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.
B.
Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.
C.
Switch Rating: Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current.
D.
Mounting Provisions: Internal to system cabinet.
2.10
A.
OUTPUT ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
Description: Shielded unit with low forward transfer impedance up to 3 kHz, minimum. Include
the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION SECTION
Panelboards: Comply with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" except provide assembly integral
to UPS cabinet.
MONITORING BY REMOTE STATUS AND ALARM PANEL
Description: Labeled LEDs on panel faceplate indicate five basic status conditions. Audible
signal indicates alarm conditions. Silencing switch in face of panel silences signal without
altering visual indication.
1.
2.13
A.
Comply with applicable portions of UL 1561, including requirements for nonlinear load
current-handling capability for a K-factor of approximately 20.
Output Impedance at Fundamental Frequency: Between 3 and 4 percent.
Regulation: 5 percent, maximum, at rated nonlinear load current.
Full-Load Efficiency at Rated Nonlinear Load Current: 96 percent, minimum.
Electrostatic Shielding of Windings: Independent for each winding.
Coil Leads: Physically arranged for minimum interlead capacitance.
Shield Grounding Terminal: Separately mounted; labeled "Shield Ground."
Capacitive Coupling between Primary and Secondary: 33 picofarads, maximum, over a
frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
Cabinet and Faceplate: Surface or flush mounted to suit mounting conditions indicated.
BASIC BATTERY MONITORING
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Albercorp.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
3.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
BTECH, Inc.
Eaton Corporation; Powerware Division.
B.
Battery Ground-Fault Detector: Initiates alarm when resistance to ground of positive or negative
bus of battery is less than 5000 ohms.
C.
Battery compartment smoke/high-temperature detector initiates an alarm when smoke or a
temperature greater than 75 deg C occurs within the compartment.
D.
Annunciation of Alarms: At UPS control panel.
2.14
A.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Factory test complete UPS system before shipment. Use actual batteries that are part of final
installation. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective
devices.
Full-load test.
Transient-load response test.
Overload test.
Power failure test.
B.
Observation of Test: Give 14 days' advance notice of tests and provide opportunity for Owner's
representative to observe tests at Owner's choice.
C.
Report test results. Include the following data:
1.
2.
3.
Description of input source and output loads used. Describe actions required to simulate
source load variation and various operating conditions and malfunctions.
List of indications, parameter values, and system responses considered satisfactory for
each test action. Include tabulation of actual observations during test.
List of instruments and equipment used in factory tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
conditions affecting performance of the UPS.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment Mounting: Install UPS on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete
base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of
concrete base.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 10
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.
3.
4.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
B.
Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written
instructions and NFPA 70.
C.
Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits
according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated.
3.3
GROUNDING
A.
3.4
Separately Derived Systems: If not part of a listed power supply for a data-processing room,
comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding electrodes and for bonding to
metallic piping near isolation transformer.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
1.
3.5
Identify each battery cell individually.
BATTERY EQUALIZATION
A.
3.6
Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.
individual-cell voltages.
Record
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections.
Component type and labeling verification.
Ratings of installed components.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 11
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
4.
5.
6.
Inspect batteries and chargers according to requirements in NETA Acceptance Testing
Specifications.
Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm
functions.
Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment.
Load the system using a variable-load bank to simulate kilovolt amperes, kilowatts, and
power factor of loads for unit's rating. Use instruments calibrated within the previous six
months according to NIST standards.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
7.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Simulate malfunctions to verify protective device operation.
Test duration of supply on emergency, low-battery voltage shutdown, and transfers
and restoration due to normal source failure.
Test harmonic content of input and output current less than 25, 50, and 100
percent of rated loads.
Test output voltage under specified transient-load conditions.
Test efficiency at 50, 75, and 100 percent of rated loads.
Test remote status and alarm panel functions.
Test battery-monitoring system functions.
Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
E.
The UPS system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and inspections,
including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and inspection criteria.
Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.7
PERFORMANCE TESTING
A.
Engage the services of a qualified power quality specialist to perform tests and activities for
each UPS system.
B.
Monitoring and Testing Schedule: Perform monitoring and testing in a single 10-day period.
1.
2.
C.
Schedule monitoring and testing activity with Owner, through Architect, with at least 14
days' advance notice.
Schedule monitoring and testing after Substantial Completion, when the UPS is supplying
power to its intended load.
Monitoring and Testing Instruments: Three-phase, recording, power monitors. Instruments
shall provide continuous simultaneous monitoring of electrical parameters at UPS input
terminals and at input terminals of loads served by the UPS. Instruments shall monitor,
measure, and graph voltage current and frequency simultaneously and provide full-graphic
recordings of the values of those parameters before and during power-line disturbances that
cause the values to deviate from normal beyond the adjustable threshold values. Instruments
shall be capable of recording either on paper or on magnetic media and have a minimum
accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent for electrical parameters. Parameters to be monitored
include the following:
1.
2.
Current: Each phase and neutral and grounding conductors.
Voltage: Phase to phase, phase to neutral, phase to ground, and neutral to ground.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 12
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Frequency transients.
Voltage swells and sags.
Voltage Impulses: Phase to phase, phase to neutral, phase to ground, and neutral to
ground.
High-frequency noise.
Radio-frequency interference.
THD of the above currents and voltages.
Harmonic content of currents and voltages above.
Monitoring and Testing Procedures for Each Test Period:
1.
2.
Exploratory Period: For the first two days, make recordings at various circuit locations
and with various parameter-threshold and sampling-interval settings. Make these
measurements with the objective of identifying optimum UPS, power system, load, and
instrumentation setup conditions for subsequent test and monitoring operations.
Remainder of Test Period: Perform continuous monitoring of at least two circuit locations
selected on the basis of data obtained during exploratory period.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Set thresholds and sampling intervals for recording data at values selected to
optimize data on performance of the UPS for values indicated, and to highlight the
need to adjust, repair, or modify the UPS, distribution system, or load component
that may influence its performance or that may require better power quality.
Perform load and UPS power source switching and operate the UPS on generator
power during portions of test period according to directions of Owner's power
quality specialist.
Operate the UPS and its loads in each mode of operation permitted by UPS
controls and by the power distribution system design.
Using temporarily connected resistive/inductive load banks and a temporarily
connected portable generator set, create and simulate unusual operating
conditions, including outages, voltage swells and sags, and voltage, current, and
frequency transients. Maintain normal operating loads in operation on system to
maximum extent possible during tests.
Make adjustments and repairs to UPS, distribution, and load equipment to correct
deficiencies disclosed by monitoring and testing and repeat appropriate monitoring
and testing to verify success of corrective action.
Monitoring and Testing Assistance by Contractor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open UPS and electrical distribution and load equipment and wiring enclosures to make
monitoring and testing points accessible for temporary monitoring probe and sensor
placement and removal as requested.
Observe monitoring and testing operations; ensure that UPS and distribution and load
equipment warranties are not compromised.
Perform switching and control of various UPS units, electrical distribution systems, and
load components as directed by power quality specialist. Specialist shall design this
portion of monitoring and testing operations to expose the UPS to various operating
environments, conditions, and events while response is observed, electrical parameters
are monitored, and system and equipment deficiencies are identified.
Make repairs and adjustments to the UPS and to electrical distribution system and load
components, and retest and repeat monitoring as needed to verify validity of results and
correction of deficiencies.
Engage the services of the UPS manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative
periodically during performance testing operations for repairs, adjustments, and
consultations.
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 13
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
F.
Documentation: Record test point and sensor locations, instrument settings, and circuit and
load conditions for each monitoring summary and power disturbance recording. Coordinate
simultaneous recordings made on UPS input and load circuits.
G.
Analysis of Recorded Data and Report: Review and analyze test observations and recorded
data and submit a detailed written report. Include the following in each report:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
H.
3.8
Description of corrective actions performed during monitoring and survey work and their
results.
Recommendations for further action to provide optimum performance by the UPS and
appropriate power quality for non-UPS loads. Include a statement of priority ranking and
a cost estimate for each recommendation that involves system or equipment revisions.
Copies of monitoring summary graphics and graphics illustrating harmonic content of
significant voltages and currents.
Copies of graphics of power disturbance recordings that illustrate findings, conclusions,
and recommendations.
Recommendations for operating, adjusting, or revising UPS controls.
Recommendation for alterations to the UPS installation.
Recommendations for adjusting or revising generator-set or automatic transfer switch
installations or their controls.
Recommendations for power distribution system revisions.
Recommendations for adjusting or revising electrical loads, their connections, or controls.
Interim and Final Reports: Provide an interim report at the end of each test period and a final
comprehensive report at the end of final test and analysis period.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain the UPS.
END OF SECTION 263353
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263353 - 14
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Automatic transfer switches.
Bypass/isolation switches.
Remote annunciation systems.
Division 21 Section "Electric-Drive, Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer switches for fire
pumps.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum
clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and
material lists for each switch specified.
1.
1.4
Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation
switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined
transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
a.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2.
3.
B.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
Field quality-control test reports.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.6
Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,
including software, where applicable.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and
emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of
notification.
B.
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches bypass/isolation switches remote
annunciators and remote annunciator and control panels through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E.
Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
G.
Comply with NFPA 110.
H.
Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers:
following:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
1.
Contactor Transfer Switches:
a.
Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.
b.
GE Zenith Controls.
c.
Russelectric, Inc.
2.
Transfer Switches Using Molded-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers are not permitted:
GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system
transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere
rating, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective
devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing
according to UL 1008.
C.
Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or
better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
D.
Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge
withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall
meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
E.
Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electricmotor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.
F.
Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current
between active power sources.
1.
2.
3.
Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case
circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.
Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.
Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional
automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing
contacts.
G.
Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched
simultaneously with phase poles.
H.
Oversize Neutral: Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units indicated for
oversize neutral shall be double the nominal rating of circuit in which switch is installed.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
I.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries.
1.
2.
3.
Float type rated 10 A.
Ammeter to display charging current.
Fused ac inputs and dc outputs.
J.
Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches
for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control
panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device.
K.
Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings,
either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.
Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
L.
2.3
Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring
indicated.
Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom
entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508,
unless otherwise indicated.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A.
Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B.
Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops
during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources
energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically
disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.
D.
Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates
in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
E.
Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator
and control panel.
F.
Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components: are not permitted.
G.
Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnect motors
before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer.
Control connection to motor starters is through wiring external to automatic transfer switch.
Time delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds,
and settings are as indicated. Relay contacts handling motor-control circuit inrush and seal
currents are rated for actual currents to be encountered.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
H.
Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground
voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of
nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value.
Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.
Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer
and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one
second.
Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup
voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at
90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal.
Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.
Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and
factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained
undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.
Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and
emergency-source sensing circuits.
a.
b.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source
Available."
Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency
Source Available."
Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts
for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.
Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer
switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of
normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.
Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and
normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.
Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory
set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls
after retransfer of load to normal source.
Engine-Generator Exerciser:
Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine
generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers
and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset
intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30
minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without
load transfer.
Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.
Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not
available.
BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES
A.
Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
B.
Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly to
load, isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. Include the following
features for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
2.5
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates transfer switch with an
arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated.
While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer-switch operation, except for testing or
maintenance.
Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live parts
and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.
Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit Withstand Ratings:
Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch, and with same
phase arrangement and number of poles.
Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those of automatic
transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.
Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be performed
by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.
Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall
describe operating instructions.
Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front
without removing other parts or main power conductors.
Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factoryinstalled copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated available
short-circuit current.
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM
A.
Functional Description: Remote annunciator panel shall annunciate conditions for indicated
transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Annunciator Panel: LED-lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer-switch
controls.
Switch position.
Switch in test mode.
Failure of communication link.
Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored.
Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and identity of
load it serves.
Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated.
Lamp Test: Push-to-test or lamp-test switch on front panel.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure
proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for
compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with
NEMA ICS 1.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and
according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Electrical Systems."
B.
Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
1.
Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more
than 4 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless
otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases
according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C.
Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
E.
Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control
and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer.
Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required
wiring.
B.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
C.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests
and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
C.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
4.
Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulationresistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages
and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified
minimum resistance.
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of
emergency source with normal source available.
Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
Verify time-delay settings.
Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control
settings.
Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch
operations.
Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values
exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent
from other poles.
Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cooldown and shutdown.
Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power
delivery from both sources.
a.
D.
Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of
barriers, covers, and safety features.
Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
Perform manual transfer operation.
After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for
each switch at least three times.
a.
6.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulationresistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages
and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified
minimum resistance.
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of
barriers, covers, and safety features.
Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
Perform manual transfer operation.
After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for
each switch at least three times.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 8
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
5.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of
emergency source with normal source available.
Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.
Verify time-delay settings.
Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control
settings.
Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch
operations.
Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values
exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent
from other poles.
Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cooldown and shutdown.
Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power
delivery from both sources.
a.
Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
E.
Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
F.
Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each
tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
G.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
H.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and
connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked
and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
B.
Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
END OF SECTION 263600
TRANSFER SWITCHES
263600 - 9
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
Emergency lighting units.
Exit signs.
Lighting fixture supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
BF: Ballast factor.
B.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
C.
CU: Coefficient of utilization.
D.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
E.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
F.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
G.
RCR: Room cavity ratio.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include
data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
Ballast.
Energy-efficiency data.
Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 1
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
1.
2.
3.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Lighting fixtures.
Suspended ceiling components.
Other items in finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Smoke and fire detectors.
Occupancy sensors.
Access panels.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed
by product manufacturer.
D.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
1.7
Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace
components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
C.
Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the
remaining nine years.
Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast Batteries: Seven years from date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for
the remaining six years.
Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to
Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 2
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period
indicated below.
1.
1.8
Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lamps: 5 percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
Ballasts: 1 percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
Globes and Guards: 5 percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
B.
In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that
introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified, per the contract drawings.
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B.
Incandescent Fixtures:
NEMA LE 5A.
C.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598.
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D.
HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
E.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
G.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Comply with UL 1598.
Where LER is specified, test according to
Where LER is specified, test according to
265100 - 3
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
H.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
White Surfaces: 85 percent.
Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a.
b.
2.
2.3
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Lens Thickness:
indicated.
UV stabilized.
At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is
Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless
otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be
designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Sound Rating: A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.85 or higher.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11 and shall
be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Sound Rating: A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory-wired with ballast arrangements and
bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in
the field.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 4
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
2.4
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed
for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless
dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.5
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Sound Rating: A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.
BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
A.
Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps:
indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.6
Include the following features unless otherwise
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
Sound Rating: A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
Power Factor: .90 or higher.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
Protection: Class P thermal cutout.
Auxiliary Instant-On Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz
lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when power outages occur. System
automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light
output.
EXIT SIGNS
A.
Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size,
comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Internally Lighted Signs:
1.
2.
Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained
power pack.
a.
b.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
265100 - 5
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored,
relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and
floated on charger.
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit
initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared
receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply,
providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.
Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is
annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.
Master/Remote Sign Configurations:
a.
b.
2.7
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and
provide additional capacity in LED power supply for power connection to remote
unit.
Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except
omit power supply, battery and test features. Arrange to receive full power
requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit
as a unified system.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall
yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B.
T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800
initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life
20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300
initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life
of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
T5 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900
initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average rated life
of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
T5HO rapid-start, high-output low-mercury lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2
inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and
average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500
K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use with
dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).
18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 6
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
4.
5.
6.
2.8
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
HID LAMPS
A.
2.9
Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B.
Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
E.
Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage.
F.
Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
G.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B.
Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support
element.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not
more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.
Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each
fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or
center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch
metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor
of 3.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 7
Bucks County Justice Center
Doylestown, PA
C.
Issued for Bid: September 27, 2010
HOK Project No. 09.07001.00
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1.
2.
3.
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D.
Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
E.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
END OF SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 8